EPM Manual Model 42i

Model 42i
Instruction Manual
Chemiluminescence NO-NO2-NOx Analyzer
Part Number 101350-00
25Jul2015
2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. All rights reserved.
Specifications, terms and pricing are subject to change. Not all products are available in all countries. Please
consult your local sales representative for details.
Thermo Fisher Scientific

Air Quality Instruments
27 Forge Parkway
Franklin, MA 02038
1-508-520-0430
www.thermo.com/aqi
WEEE Compliance
This product is required to comply with the European Unions Waste
Electrical & Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC. It is
marked with the following symbol:
Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more

recycling/disposal companies in each EU Member State, and this product
should be disposed of or recycled through them. Further information on
Thermo Fisher Scientifics compliance with these Directives, the recyclers
in your country, and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products
which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive
are available at: www.thermo.com/WEEERoHS.
Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance

Reference Method Designation
The Thermo Scientific Model 42i is designated by the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) as a Reference Method for the
measurement of ambient concentrations of nitrogen dioxide pursuant with
the requirements defined in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part
53.
Designated Reference Method Number: RFNA-1289-074
EPA Designation Date: December 11, 1989 (amended for Model 42i)
The Model 42i Chemiluminescence NO-NO2-NOx Analyzer meets EPA
reference designation requirements when operated with the following:
Range 50 to 1000 ppb

Averaging Time 10 to 300 seconds
Temperature Range 15 to 35 C
Line Voltage 90 to 110 Vac @50/60 Hertz
105 to 125 Vac @50/60 Hertz
210 to 250 Vac @50/60 Hertz
Pressure Compensation ON or OFF
Temperature Compensation ON or OFF
Flow Rate 0.5 to 1 LPM
RS-232/RS-485 Interface
With or without the following options:
Teflon Particulate Filter

Ozone Particulate Filter
Internal Zero/Span and Sample Valves
Ozone Permeation Dryer
Permeation Oven
Rack Mounts
I/O Expansion Board
Thermo Fisher Scientific Reference Method Designation

About This Manual
This manual provides information about operating, maintaining, and
servicing the analyzer. It also contains important alerts to ensure safe
operation and prevent equipment damage. The manual is organized into
the following chapters and appendixes to provide direct access to specific
operation and service information.
Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features,
describes the principles of operation, and lists the specifications.
Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack, setup, and startup
the analyzer.
Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display, the front
panel pushbuttons, and the menu-driven software.
Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the
analyzer and describes the required equipment.
Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures
to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation.
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing
analyzer failures, isolating faults, and includes recommended actions for
restoring proper operation.
Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on
the analyzer, step-by-step instructions for repairing and replacing
components, and a replacement parts list. It also includes contact
information for product support and technical information.
Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of
the system components, provides an overview of the software structure,
and includes a description of the system electronics and input/output
connections.
Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment
that can be used with this analyzer.
Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement.
Appendix B C-Link Protocol Commands provides a description of
the C-Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an
analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger.
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual i

About This Manual
Safety
Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the

MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS-232/485
(RTU protocol) as well as TCP/IP over Ethernet.
Appendix D Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol provides a
description of the Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen or BH) Protocol Interface
and is supported both over RS-232/485 as well as TCP/IP over
Ethernet.
Safety Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer.
This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer,
however, if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the
manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Safety and Equipment This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety
hazards and risks of equipment damage. Refer to the following types of
Damage Alerts alerts you may see in this manual.
Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions

Alert Description
DANGER A hazard is present that could result in death or serious
personal injury if the warning is ignored.
WARNING A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious

personal injury if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to

moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored.
Equipment Damage A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property

damage if the warning is ignored.
ii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

About This Manual
Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts
Safety and Equipment damage Alerts in this Manual

Alert Description
WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by
the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
The service procedures in this manual are restricted to
qualified service personnel only.
The Model 42i is supplied with a three-wire grounding
cord. Under no circumstances should this grounding
system be defeated.
CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks, do not to let the liquid crystal
contact your skin or clothes. If the liquid crystal contacts
your skin or clothes, wash it off immediately using soap
and water.
Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other
external fittings.
Some internal components can be damaged by small

amounts of static electricity. A properly ground antistatic
wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal
component.
This adjustment should only be performed by an
instrument service technician.
Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges only.
Do not remove the panel or frame from the LCD module.

The LCD module polarizing plate is very fragile, handle it
carefully.
Do not wipe the LCD module polarizing plate with a dry
cloth, it may easily scratch the plate.
Do not use Ketonics solvent or aromatic solvent to clean
the LCD module, use a soft cloth moistened with a
naphtha cleaning solvent.
Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or
corrosive gases.
Do not shake or jolt the LCD module.
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual iii

About This Manual
FCC Compliance
FCC Compliance Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the
equipment.
Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
WEEE Symbol The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on
the instrument and in the associated documentation.
Symbol Description
Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste
electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002/96/EC
(WEEE) and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August
2005.
Where to Get Help Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide. Contact one of
the phone numbers below for product support and technical information
or visit us on the web at www.thermo.com/aqi.
1-866-282-0430 Toll Free

1-508-520-0430 International
iv Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1
Principle of Operation ........................................................................ 1-2
Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-3
Chapter 2 Installation ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Lifting ................................................................................................. 2-1
Unpacking and Inspection .................................................................. 2-1
Setup Procedure .................................................................................. 2-3
Connecting External Devices .............................................................. 2-5
Terminal Board PCB Assemblies ...................................................... 2-5
I/O Terminal Board ...................................................................... 2-5
D/O Terminal Board .................................................................... 2-7
25-Pin Terminal Board ................................................................. 2-8
Startup ................................................................................................ 2-9
Chapter 3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 3-1

Display ................................................................................................ 3-1
Pushbuttons ........................................................................................ 3-2
Soft Keys .......................................................................................... 3-3
Alphanumeric Entry Screen.............................................................. 3-4
Firmware Overview ............................................................................. 3-4
Power-Up Screen ............................................................................. 3-6
Run Screen ....................................................................................... 3-6
Main Menu ...................................................................................... 3-7
Range Menu ....................................................................................... 3-8
Single Range Mode .......................................................................... 3-8
Dual Range Mode ............................................................................ 3-9
Auto Range Mode .......................................................................... 3-11
Gas Units ....................................................................................... 3-13
NO, NO2, and NOx Ranges ........................................................... 3-13
Set Custom Ranges ........................................................................ 3-15
Custom Ranges ........................................................................... 3-16
Averaging Time ................................................................................. 3-16
Calibration Factors Menu ................................................................. 3-17
NO and NOx Backgrounds ............................................................ 3-17
NO, NO2, and NOx Coefficients ................................................... 3-19
Reset User Calibration Defaults ..................................................... 3-19
Calibration Menu ............................................................................. 3-20
Calibrate NO and NOx Backgrounds ............................................. 3-20
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual v

Contents
Calibrate NO, NO2, and NOx Coefficients .................................... 3-21

Zero/Span Check ........................................................................... 3-21
Next Time .................................................................................. 3-22
Period Hours............................................................................... 3-22
Total Duration Hour .................................................................. 3-23
Zero/Span/Purge Duration Minutes ........................................... 3-23
Zero/Span Averaging Time ......................................................... 3-23
Zero/Span Calibration Reset ....................................................... 3-24
Zero/Span Ratio .......................................................................... 3-24
Instrument Controls Menu ............................................................... 3-24
Ozonator ........................................................................................ 3-25
PMT Supply .................................................................................. 3-26
Auto/Manual Mode ....................................................................... 3-26
Datalogging Settings ...................................................................... 3-26
Select Srec/Lrec ........................................................................... 3-27
View Logged Data....................................................................... 3-28
Number of Records ..................................................................... 3-28
Date and Time ............................................................................ 3-28
Erase Log .................................................................................... 3-29
Select Content............................................................................. 3-29
Choose Field Data....................................................................... 3-30
Concentrations............................................................................ 3-30
Other Measurements ................................................................... 3-31
Analog Inputs.............................................................................. 3-32
Commit Content ........................................................................ 3-32
Reset to Default Content ............................................................ 3-32
Configure Datalogging ................................................................ 3-33
Logging Period Min .................................................................... 3-33
Memory Allocation Percent......................................................... 3-33
Data Treatment .......................................................................... 3-34
Communication Settings................................................................ 3-34
Serial Settings .............................................................................. 3-35
Baud Rate ................................................................................... 3-35
Data Bits ..................................................................................... 3-35
Parity .......................................................................................... 3-36
Stop Bits ..................................................................................... 3-36
RS-232/RS-485 Selection............................................................ 3-36
Instrument ID............................................................................. 3-37
Communication Protocol............................................................ 3-37
Streaming Data Configuration .................................................... 3-38
Streaming Data Interval .............................................................. 3-38
Choose Stream Data ................................................................... 3-39
Concentrations............................................................................ 3-39
Other Measurements ................................................................... 3-40
Analog Inputs.............................................................................. 3-40
TCP/IP Settings .......................................................................... 3-41
vi Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Contents
Use DHCP ................................................................................. 3-41

IP Address ................................................................................... 3-42
Netmask...................................................................................... 3-42
Default Gateway ......................................................................... 3-42
Host Name ................................................................................. 3-43
Network Time Protocol Server .................................................... 3-43
I/O Configuration.......................................................................... 3-43
Output Relay Settings ................................................................. 3-44
Logic State .................................................................................. 3-44
Instrument State ......................................................................... 3-45
Alarms ......................................................................................... 3-45
Non-Alarm ................................................................................. 3-46
Digital Input Settings .................................................................. 3-47
Logic State .................................................................................. 3-47
Instrument Action ....................................................................... 3-48
Analog Output Configuration (Select Channel) .......................... 3-48
Allow Over/Under Range ............................................................ 3-48
Analog Output Configuration (Select Action) ............................. 3-49
Select Range ................................................................................ 3-49
Minimum and Maximum Value ................................................. 3-50
Choose Signal to Output ............................................................ 3-51
Analog Input Configuration ........................................................ 3-53
Descriptor ................................................................................... 3-53
Units ........................................................................................... 3-54
Decimal Places ............................................................................ 3-54
Number of Table Points.............................................................. 3-54
Table Point ................................................................................. 3-55
Volts ........................................................................................... 3-55
User Value .................................................................................. 3-56
Temperature Compensation........................................................... 3-56
Pressure Compensation .................................................................. 3-57
Screen Contrast .............................................................................. 3-57
Service Mode ................................................................................. 3-58
Date/Time ..................................................................................... 3-58
Timezone ....................................................................................... 3-59
Diagnostics Menu ............................................................................. 3-59
Program Version ............................................................................ 3-60
Voltages ......................................................................................... 3-60
Motherboard Voltages ................................................................. 3-61
Interface Board Voltages ............................................................. 3-61
I/O Board Voltages ..................................................................... 3-61
Temperatures ................................................................................. 3-62
Pressure .......................................................................................... 3-62
Flow ............................................................................................... 3-62
Analog Input Readings ................................................................... 3-63
Analog Input Voltages .................................................................... 3-63
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual vii

Contents
Digital Inputs ................................................................................. 3-63

Relay States .................................................................................... 3-64
Test Analog Outputs ...................................................................... 3-64
Set Analog Outputs ..................................................................... 3-64
Instrument Configuration .............................................................. 3-65
Contact Information ...................................................................... 3-65
Alarms Menu .................................................................................... 3-66
Internal Temperature ..................................................................... 3-67
Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits ................................. 3-67
Chamber Temperature ................................................................... 3-67
Min and Max Chamber Temperature Limits .............................. 3-68
Cooler Temperature ....................................................................... 3-68
Min and Max Cooler Temperature Limits .................................. 3-68
Converter Temperature .................................................................. 3-69
Min and Max Converter Temperature Limits ............................. 3-69
Permeation Oven Gas Temperature ............................................... 3-69
Min and Max Permeation Oven Temperature Limits.................. 3-70
Pressure .......................................................................................... 3-70
Min and Max Pressure Limits ..................................................... 3-71
Flow ............................................................................................... 3-71
Min and Max Flow Limits .......................................................... 3-71
Ozonator Flow ............................................................................... 3-72
Zero and Span Check ..................................................................... 3-72
Max Zero and Span Check Offset ............................................... 3-72
Zero and Span Auto Calibration .................................................... 3-73
NO, NO2, and NOx Concentration ............................................... 3-73
Min and Max NO, NO2, and NOx Concentration Limits........... 3-74
Min Trigger ................................................................................ 3-74
External Alarms .............................................................................. 3-74
Service Menu .................................................................................... 3-75
PMT Voltage Adjustment .............................................................. 3-75
Range Mode Select ......................................................................... 3-76
Converter Set Temperature ............................................................ 3-76
Pressure Calibration ....................................................................... 3-77
Calibrate Pressure Zero ............................................................... 3-77
Calibrate Pressure Span ............................................................... 3-78
Restore Default Pressure Calibration ........................................... 3-78
Flow Calibration ............................................................................ 3-78
Calibrate Flow Zero .................................................................... 3-79
Calibrate Flow Span .................................................................... 3-79
Restore Default Flow Calibration ................................................ 3-80
Input Board Calibration ................................................................. 3-80
Manual Input Calibration ........................................................... 3-81
Automatic Input Calibration ....................................................... 3-81
Input Frequency Display ............................................................. 3-82
Temperature Calibration ................................................................ 3-82
viii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Contents
Analog Output Calibration ............................................................ 3-83

Analog Output Calibrate Zero .................................................... 3-84
Analog Output Calibrate Full-Scale ............................................ 3-84
Analog Input Calibration ............................................................... 3-84
Analog Input Calibrate Zero ....................................................... 3-85
Analog Input Calibrate Full-Scale ............................................... 3-85
Permeation Oven Settings .............................................................. 3-86
Calibrate Gas Thermistor ............................................................ 3-86
Water Bath.................................................................................. 3-87
Resistor ....................................................................................... 3-87
Calibrate Oven Thermistor ......................................................... 3-87
Permeation Oven Selection ......................................................... 3-88
Factory Calibrate Gas Thermistor ............................................... 3-88
Low and High Points .................................................................. 3-88
Set Defaults ................................................................................. 3-89
Factory Calibrate Oven Thermistor............................................. 3-89
Low and High Points .................................................................. 3-89
Set Defaults ................................................................................. 3-90
Ozonator Safety ............................................................................. 3-90
Extended Ranges ............................................................................ 3-91
Dilution Ratio ................................................................................ 3-91
Display Pixel Test .......................................................................... 3-91
Restore User Defaults ..................................................................... 3-92
Password Menu ................................................................................. 3-92
Set Password .................................................................................. 3-93
Lock Instrument ............................................................................ 3-93
Lock/Unlock and Local/Remote Operation ................................ 3-93
Change Password ........................................................................... 3-94
Remove Password........................................................................... 3-94
Unlock Instrument......................................................................... 3-94
Chapter 4 Calibration .......................................................................................................... 4-1

Equipment Required ........................................................................... 4-1
Zero Gas Generator.......................................................................... 4-2
Compression ................................................................................. 4-2
Drying .......................................................................................... 4-2
Oxidation ...................................................................................... 4-2
Scrubbing ...................................................................................... 4-2
Gas Phase Titrator............................................................................ 4-3
Flow Controllers ........................................................................... 4-3
Pressure Regulator ......................................................................... 4-3
Ozone Generator .......................................................................... 4-4
Diverter Valve ............................................................................... 4-4
Reaction Chamber ........................................................................ 4-4
Mixing Chamber ........................................................................... 4-4
Output Manifold .......................................................................... 4-4
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual ix

Contents
Reagents ........................................................................................... 4-4

NO Concentration Standard ......................................................... 4-4
Assaying a Working NO Standard Against a NIST-traceable NO
Standard........................................................................................ 4-5
Zero Air ........................................................................................ 4-6
Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator .......................... 4-6
Determining GPT System Flow Conditions ................................. 4-6
Pre-Calibration ................................................................................... 4-8
Calibration .......................................................................................... 4-9
Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer ......................................... 4-9
Adjust Instrument Gain ................................................................. 4-10
Set NO and NOx Background to Zero ........................................ 4-10
Calibrate the NO Channel to the NO Calibration Gas ............... 4-11
Calibrate the NOx Channel to the NOx Calibration Gas ............. 4-12
Preparing NO, NOx, and NO2 Calibration Curves ..................... 4-13
Alternative Calibration Procedure Using NO2 Permeation Tube.... 4-16
Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode ............................ 4-16
Set NO and NOx Background Readings to Zero ............................ 4-16
Calibrate Low NO ......................................................................... 4-17
Calibrate Low NOx ........................................................................ 4-17
Calibrate Low NO2 ........................................................................ 4-18
Calibrate High NO ........................................................................ 4-19
Calibrate High NOx ....................................................................... 4-19
Calibrate High NO2 ....................................................................... 4-19
Zero and Span Check ........................................................................ 4-20
Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................. 5-1

Safety Precautions ............................................................................... 5-1
Replacement Parts ............................................................................... 5-2
Cleaning the Outside Case .................................................................. 5-2
Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement ............................... 5-2
Capillaries Inspection and Replacement .............................................. 5-2
Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning .......................... 5-4
Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning .................................................... 5-4
Pump Rebuilding ................................................................................ 5-5
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 6-1

Troubleshooting Guides ...................................................................... 6-1
Board-Level Connection Diagrams ..................................................... 6-6
Connector Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 6-8
Service Locations ............................................................................... 6-21
Chapter 7 Servicing ............................................................................................................. 7-1

x Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Contents
Firmware Updates ............................................................................... 7-4

Accessing the Service Mode ................................................................. 7-4
Replacement Parts List ........................................................................ 7-4
Cable List ............................................................................................ 7-6
External Device Connection Components .......................................... 7-6
Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel 7-8
Pump Replacement ............................................................................. 7-9
Fan/Filter Replacement ..................................................................... 7-10
PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement ............ 7-11
Photomultiplier Tube Replacement .................................................. 7-13
PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement................................ 7-14
PMT Voltage Adjustment ................................................................. 7-16
Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal .......................................... 7-17
NO2-to-NO Converter Replacement ................................................ 7-18
Solenoid Valve Replacement ............................................................. 7-20
Ozonator Assembly Replacement ...................................................... 7-21
Ozonator Transformer Replacement ................................................. 7-23
Input Board Replacement ................................................................. 7-23
Input Board Calibration .................................................................... 7-25
DC Power Supply Replacement ........................................................ 7-25
Analog Output Testing ..................................................................... 7-26
Analog Output Calibration ............................................................... 7-29
Analog Input Calibration .................................................................. 7-30
Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts ................................ 7-30
Calibrating the Input Channels to Full-Scale ................................. 7-30
Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement ...................................... 7-31
Pressure Transducer Calibration ........................................................ 7-32
Temperature Control Board Replacement ......................................... 7-34
Ambient Temperature Calibration .................................................... 7-35
Fuse Replacement ............................................................................. 7-36
Scrubber Replacement ....................................................................... 7-36
I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement ................................. 7-37
Digital Output Board Replacement................................................... 7-39
Motherboard Replacement ................................................................ 7-39
Measurement Interface Board Replacement ...................................... 7-40
Flow Transducer Replacement .......................................................... 7-41
Flow Transducer Calibration............................................................. 7-42
Front Panel Board Replacement ........................................................ 7-44
LCD Module Replacement ............................................................... 7-45
Service Locations ............................................................................... 7-46
Chapter 8 System Description .......................................................................................... 8-1

Hardware ............................................................................................ 8-1
NO2-to-NO Converter ....................................................................... 8-2
Mode Solenoid ................................................................................. 8-2
Reaction Chamber .............................................................................. 8-2
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xi

Contents
Optical Filter.................................................................................... 8-3

Pressure Transducer ......................................................................... 8-3
Sample Flow Sensor ......................................................................... 8-3
Ozonator ............................................................................................. 8-3
Ozonator Flow Switch ..................................................................... 8-3
Photomultiplier Tube ......................................................................... 8-3
Photomultiplier Tube Cooler .............................................................. 8-3
Pump .................................................................................................. 8-3
Sample Capillary .............................................................................. 8-3
Dry Air Capillary ............................................................................. 8-4
Software .............................................................................................. 8-4
Instrument Control .......................................................................... 8-4
Monitoring Signals........................................................................... 8-4
Measurement Calculations ............................................................... 8-5
Output Communication .................................................................. 8-5
Electronics .......................................................................................... 8-6
Motherboard .................................................................................... 8-6
External Connectors ...................................................................... 8-6
Internal Connectors ...................................................................... 8-6
Measurement Interface Board .......................................................... 8-7
Measurement Interface Board Connectors..................................... 8-7
Flow Sensor Assembly ...................................................................... 8-7
Pressure Sensor Assembly ................................................................. 8-7
Temperature Control Board ............................................................. 8-7
PMT Power Supply Assembly .......................................................... 8-8
Input Board Assembly ...................................................................... 8-8
Digital Output Board ....................................................................... 8-8
I/O Expansion Board (Optional) ..................................................... 8-8
Front Panel Connector Board .......................................................... 8-9
I/O Components................................................................................. 8-9
Analog Voltage Outputs ................................................................... 8-9
Analog Current Outputs (Optional) .............................................. 8-10
Analog Voltage Inputs (Optional) .................................................. 8-10
Digital Relay Outputs .................................................................... 8-10
Digital Inputs ................................................................................. 8-10
Serial Ports ..................................................................................... 8-11
RS-232 Connection ....................................................................... 8-11
RS-485 Connection ....................................................................... 8-12
Ethernet Connection ...................................................................... 8-12
External Accessory Connector ........................................................ 8-12
Chapter 9 Optional Equipment........................................................................................... 9-1

Internal Zero/Span and Sample Valves ................................................ 9-1
Internal Permeation Span Source ........................................................ 9-2
Permeation Tube Installation ........................................................... 9-3
Computation of Concentrations ...................................................... 9-4
xii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Contents
Oven Installation and Configuration................................................ 9-4

Permeation Tube Oven Calibration ................................................. 9-6
Setting Perm Oven Temperature ................................................... 9-6
Setting Temperature with Water Bath........................................... 9-7
Setting Temperature with Known Resistance ................................ 9-8
Determining Permeation Rate by Weight Loss ................................. 9-9
Determining Release Rate by Transfer Standard............................... 9-9
Ozonator Permeation Dryer .............................................................. 9-10
Sample Permeation Dryer ................................................................. 9-10
Lag Volume ...................................................................................... 9-10
Principle of Operation ................................................................... 9-10
Lag Volume Test ............................................................................ 9-12
Ammonia Scrubber ........................................................................... 9-12
Teflon Particulate Filter .................................................................... 9-12
Ozone Particulate Filter .................................................................... 9-13
NO2-to-NO Converter ..................................................................... 9-13
I/O Expansion Board Assembly ......................................................... 9-13
25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly ...................................................... 9-13
Terminal Block and Cable Kits ......................................................... 9-13
Cables ............................................................................................... 9-14
Mounting Options ............................................................................ 9-15
Appendix A Warranty ............................................................................................................ A-1

Warranty ............................................................................................. A-1
Appendix B C-Link Protocol Commands............................................................................ B-1

Instrument Identification Number ...................................................... B-1
Commands ......................................................................................... B-2
Convert Concentration Formats....................................................... B-3
Commands List ................................................................................ B-3
Measurements ................................................................................... B-10
Alarms ............................................................................................... B-14
Diagnostics ....................................................................................... B-18
Datalogging....................................................................................... B-19
Calibration ........................................................................................ B-27
Keys/Display ..................................................................................... B-33
Measurement Configuration ............................................................. B-35
Hardware Configuration ................................................................... B-39
Communications Configuration ....................................................... B-43
I/O Configuration............................................................................. B-49
Record Layout Definition ................................................................. B-55
Format Specifier for ASCII Responses ............................................ B-55
Format Specifier for Binary Responses ........................................... B-56
Format Specifier for EREC Layout................................................. B-56
Text ............................................................................................ B-56
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xiii

Contents
Value String ................................................................................ B-57

Value Source ............................................................................... B-57
Alarm Information ...................................................................... B-57
Translation Table ........................................................................ B-57
Selection Table ............................................................................ B-57
Button Designator....................................................................... B-58
Examples ..................................................................................... B-59
Appendix C MODBUS Protocol............................................................................................ C-1

Serial Communication Parameters ..................................................... C-1
TCP Communication Parameters ...................................................... C-2
Application Data Unit Definition ...................................................... C-2
Slave Address................................................................................... C-2
MBAP Header ................................................................................ C-2
Function Code ................................................................................ C-3
Data ................................................................................................ C-3
Error Check .................................................................................... C-3
Function Codes .................................................................................. C-3
(0x01/0x02) Read Coils / Read Inputs ............................................ C-3
(0x03/0x04) Read Holding Registers / Read Input Registers ........... C-5
(0x05) Force (Write) Single Coil ..................................................... C-7
MODBUS Parameters Supported ...................................................... C-8
Reading a Write Coil .................................................................... C-14
Appendix D Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol ........................................................... D-1

Serial Communication Parameters ..................................................... D-1
TCP Communication Parameters ...................................................... D-2
Instrument Address ............................................................................ D-2
Abbreviations Used ............................................................................ D-2
Basic Command Structure ................................................................. D-2
Block Checksum Characters <BCC> .................................................. D-3
Geysitech Commands ........................................................................ D-3
Instrument Control Command (ST) ............................................... D-3
Data Sampling/Data Query Command (DA).................................. D-4
Measurements reported in response to DA command ..................... D-6
Single Range Mode ...................................................................... D-6
Dual/Auto Range Mode ............................................................... D-6
Operating and Error Status ............................................................. D-6
xiv Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Figures
Figure 11. Model 42i Flow Schematic ............................................................. 1-3
Figure 21. Remove the Packing Material ......................................................... 2-2
Figure 22. Remove the Shipping Screws ......................................................... 2-2
Figure 23. Model 42i Rear Panel ...................................................................... 2-3
Figure 24. Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing ............................................. 2-4
Figure 25. I/O Terminal Board Views ............................................................... 2-6
Figure 26. D/O Terminal Board Views.............................................................. 2-7
Figure 27. 25-Pin Terminal Board Views .......................................................... 2-8
Figure 31. Front Panel Display .......................................................................... 3-2
Figure 32. Front Panel Pushbuttons .................................................................. 3-2
Figure 33. Flowchart of Menu-Driven Software .............................................. 3-5
Figure 34. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode ............... 3-9
Figure 35. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode ................ 3-10
Figure 36. Analog Output in Auto Range Mode ............................................. 3-11
Figure 37. Pin-Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode .......................... 3-12
Figure 41. GPT System...................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 51. Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries ....................................... 5-3
Figure 52. Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters .......................................... 5-5
Figure 53. Rebuilding the Pump........................................................................ 5-7
Figure 61. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Common Electronics ............... 6-6
Figure 62. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Measurement System ............ 6-7
Figure 71. Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap ...................................... 7-4
Figure 72. Component Layout ........................................................................... 7-7
Figure 73. Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition
Panel ..................................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 74. Replacing the Pump ....................................................................... 7-10
Figure 75. Replacing the Fan .......................................................................... 7-11
Figure 76. PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber .............................................. 7-12
Figure 77. Replacing the PMT ........................................................................ 7-14
Figure 78. Replacing the PMT HVPS .............................................................. 7-15
Figure 79. Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber .............................. 7-18
Figure 710. NO2-to-NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly ........................... 7-19
Figure 711. Replacing the Solenoid Valve ..................................................... 7-21
Figure 712. Replacing the Ozonator Assembly .............................................. 7-22
Figure 713. Replacing the Input Board ........................................................... 7-24
Figure 714. Replacing the DC Power Supply.................................................. 7-26
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xv

Figures
Figure 715. Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins ................................... 7-27
Figure 716. Replacing the Pressure Transducer ............................................. 7-32
Figure 717. Replacing the Scrubber................................................................ 7-37
Figure 718. Replacing the I/O Expansion Board (Optional) ............................ 7-38
Figure 719. Rear Panel Board Connectors ...................................................... 7-38
Figure 720. Replacing the Measurement Interface Board ............................. 7-41
Figure 721. Replacing the Flow Transducer ................................................... 7-42
Figure 722. Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module............... 7-45
Figure 81. Hardware Components .................................................................... 8-2
Figure 91. Flow Diagram, Zero/Span Option .................................................... 9-2
Figure 92. Flow Diagram, Internal Permeation with Zero/Span Valve ............ 9-3
Figure 93. Flow Diagram, Lag Volume ............................................................ 9-12
Figure 91. Bench Mounting ............................................................................. 9-16
Figure 92. EIA Rack Mounting ........................................................................ 9-17
Figure 93. Retrofit Rack Mounting.................................................................. 9-18
Figure 94. Rack Mount Option Assembly ....................................................... 9-19
Figure B1. Flags .............................................................................................. B-14
xvi Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Tables
Table 11. Model 42i Specifications ................................................................. 1-3
Table 12. Model 42i Optional Permeation Oven Specifications...................... 1-4
Table 21. I/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ................................................ 2-6
Table 22. D/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions............................................... 2-7
Table 23. 25-Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ........................................... 2-8
Table 31. Front Panel Pushbuttons ................................................................... 3-3
Table 32. Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode............................... 3-9
Table 33. Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode ............................... 3-10
Table 34. Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode ............................... 3-12
Table 35. Standard Ranges............................................................................. 3-14
Table 36. Extended Ranges ............................................................................ 3-15
Table 37. Analog Output Zero to Full-Scale Table ......................................... 3-50
Table 38. Signal Type Group Choices ............................................................. 3-52
Table 41. Scrubbing Materials ......................................................................... 4-2
Table 61. Troubleshooting - General Guide ..................................................... 6-2
Table 62. Troubleshooting - Alarm Messages ................................................. 6-4
Table 63. Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions ........................................ 6-8
Table 64. Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions .......... 6-13
Table 65. Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram ..................................... 6-15
Table 66. I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Connector Pin Descriptions ......... 6-17
Table 67. Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions .......................... 6-18
Table 68. Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions ........................................ 6-20
Table 69. Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions ............... 6-20
Table 71. Model 42i Replacement Parts .......................................................... 7-4
Table 72. Model 42i Cables.............................................................................. 7-6
Table 73. External Device Connection Components ........................................ 7-6
Table 74. Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections ............ 7-28
Table 75. Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections............... 7-28
Table 81. RS-232 DB9 Connector Pin Configurations .................................... 8-12
Table 82. RS-485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration ...................................... 8-12
Table 91. Cable Options.................................................................................. 9-14
Table 92. Color Codes for 25-Pin and 37-Pin Cables ..................................... 9-14
Table 93. Mounting Options ........................................................................... 9-15
Table B1. Error Response Messages ............................................................... B-3
Table B1. C-Link Protocol Commands .............................................................. B-3
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xvii

Tables
Table B2. Averaging Times ............................................................................. B-11

Table B3. Alarm Trigger Values ...................................................................... B-18
Table B4. Record Output Formats................................................................... B-23
Table B5. Stream Time Values ....................................................................... B-27
Table B6. Standard Ranges ............................................................................ B-35
Table B7. Extended Ranges ............................................................................ B-36
Table B8. Contrast Levels ............................................................................... B-39
Table B9. Reply Termination Formats ............................................................ B-46
Table B10. Allow Mode Command Values .................................................... B-48
Table B11. Power Up Mode Values................................................................ B-48
Table B12. Set Layout Ack Values.................................................................. B-49
Table B13. Analog Current Output Range Values .......................................... B-50
Table B14. Analog Voltage Output Range Values ......................................... B-51
Table B15. Default Output Assignment.......................................................... B-52
Table C1. Read Coils for 42i ............................................................................. C-8
Table C2. Read Registers for 42i .................................................................... C-11
Table C3. Write Coils for 42i .......................................................................... C-13
Table D1. Operating Status for Model 42i ...................................................... D-7
Table D2. Error Status for Model 42i .............................................................. D-7
xviii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Chapter 1
Introduction
The Model 42i Chemiluminescence NO-NO2-NOx Analyzer combines
proven detection technology, easy to use menu-driven software, and
advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability. The
Model 42i has the following features:
320 x 240 graphics display

Menu-driven software
Field programmable ranges
User-selectable single/dual/auto range modes
Multiple user-defined analog outputs
Analog input options
High sensitivity
Fast response time
Linearity through all ranges
Internal sample pump (except with internal permeation span source
option)
Independent NO-NO2-NOx ranges
Replaceable NO2 converter cartridge
User-selectable digital input/output capabilities
Standard communications features include RS232/485 and Ethernet
C-Link, MODBUS, Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen), streaming data, and
NTP (Network Time Protocol) protocols. Simultaneous connections
from different locations over Ethernet.
For details of the analyzers principle of operation and product

specifications, see the following topics:
Principle of Operation on page 1-2
Specifications on page 1-3
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual 1-1

Introduction
Principle of Operation
Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this NO-NO2-NOx analyzer.

We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high
standards of quality, performance, and workmanship. Service personnel are
available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the
use of this analyzer. For more information on servicing, see Chapter 7,
Servicing.
Principle of The Model 42i operates on the principle that nitric oxide (NO) and ozone
(O3) react to produce a characteristic luminescence with an intensity
Operation linearly proportional to the NO concentration. Infrared light emission
results when electronically excited NO2 molecules decay to lower energy
states. Specifically:
NO + O 3 NO 2 + O 2 + h
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) must first be transformed into NO before it can

be measured using the chemiluminescent reaction. NO2 is converted to
NO by a molybdenum NO2-to-NO converter heated to about 325 C (the
optional stainless steel converter is heated to 625 C).
The ambient air sample is drawn into the Model 42i through the sample
bulkhead, as shown in Figure 11. The sample flows through a capillary,
and then to the mode solenoid valve. The solenoid valve routes the sample
either straight to the reaction chamber (NO mode) or through the NO2-to-
NO converter and then to the reaction chamber (NOx mode). A flow
sensor to the reaction chamber measures the sample flow.
Dry air enters the Model 42i through the dry air bulkhead, passes through
a flow switch, and then through a silent discharge ozonator. The ozonator
generates the ozone needed for the chemiluminescent reaction. At the
reaction chamber, the ozone reacts with the NO in the sample to produce
excited NO2 molecules. A photomultiplier tube (PMT) housed in a
thermoelectric cooler detects the luminescence generated during this
reaction. From the reaction chamber, the exhaust travels through the ozone
(O3) converter to the pump, and is released through the vent.
The NO and NOx concentrations calculated in the NO and NOx modes
are stored in memory. The difference between the concentrations is used to
calculate the NO2 concentration. The Model 42i outputs NO, NO2, and
NOx concentrations to the front panel display, the analog outputs, and also
makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection.
1-2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Introduction
Specifications
Figure 11. Model 42i Flow Schematic
Specifications Table 11 lists the specifications for the Model 42i.

Table 11. Model 42i Specifications
Preset ranges 0-0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 ppm

0-0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 mg/m3
Extended ranges 0-0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 ppm
0-0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 150 mg/m3
Custom ranges 0-0.05 to 20 ppm (0-0.2 to 100 ppm in extended ranges)
0-0.1 to 30 mg/m3 (0-0.5 to 150 mg/m3 in extended ranges)
Zero noise 0.20 ppb RMS (60 second averaging time)
Lower detectable limit 0.40 ppb (60 second averaging time)
Zero drift (24 hour) < 0.40 ppb
Span drift 1% full-scale
Response time (in 40 seconds (10 second averaging time)
automatic mode) 80 seconds (60 second averaging time)
300 seconds (300 second averaging time)
Linearity 1% full-scale
Sample flow rate 0.60.8 LPM
Operating temperature 1535 C (may be safely operated over the 045 C)*

Introduction
Specifications
Power requirements 100 VAC @ 50/60 Hz

115 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
220240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
300 watts
Physical dimensions 16.75 (W) X 8.62 (H) X 23 (D)
Weight Approximately 55 lbs.
Analog outputs 6 voltage outputs; 0100 mV, 1, 5, 10 V (user selectable), 5% of
full-scale over/under range (user selectable), 12 bit resolution,
measurement output user selectable per channel
Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C, 10 digital relays Form A, user
selectable alarm output, relay logic, 100 mA @ 200 VDC
Digital inputs 16 digital inputs, user select programmable, TTL level, pulled
high
Serial Ports 1 RS-232 or RS-485 with two connectors, baud rate 1200
115200, data bits, parity, and stop bits, protocols: C-Link,
MODBUS, Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen), and streaming data (all
user selectable)
Ethernet connection RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection, static or
dynamic TCP/IP addressing
*In non-condensing environments. Performance specifications based on operation in 1535 C range.
Table 12. Model 42i Optional Permeation Oven Specifications
Temperature control Single Point 45 C

Temperature stability 0.1 C
Warm-up time 1 hour (permeation device can take 24 to 48 hours to stabilize)
Carrier gas flow 70 scc/min
Chamber size Accepts permeation tubes up to 9 cm in total length; 1 cm in
diameter
Temperature range 1530 C
Power requirements 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz, 50 watts (in addition to the standard
Model 42i)
Weight Approximately 5 lbs. (in addition to the standard Model 42i)

Chapter 2
Installation
Installation of the Model 42i includes lifting the instrument, unpacking
and inspection, connecting sample, zero, span, and exhaust lines, and
attaching the analog and/or digital outputs to a recording device. The
installation should always be followed by instrument calibration as
described in the Calibration chapter of this manual.
Installing the Model 42i includes the following recommendations and
procedures:
Lifting on page 2-1
Unpacking and Inspection on page 2-1
Setup Procedure on page 2-3
Connecting External Devices on page 2-5
Startup on page 2-9
Lifting When lifting the instrument, use procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy
object, such as, bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and
upright. Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of
the unit. Although one person can lift the unit, it is desirable to have two
persons lifting, one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by
grasping the bottom in the rear.
Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or

other external fittings.
Unpacking and The Model 42i is shipped complete in one container. If there is obvious
damage to the shipping container when you receive the instrument, notify
Inspection the carrier immediately and hold for inspection. The carrier is responsible
for any damage incurred during shipment.
Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument.
1. Remove the instrument from its shipping container and set it on a table
or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear.

Installation
Unpacking and Inspection
2. Remove the cover to expose the internal components.
3. Remove the packing material (Figure 21).
Remove Packing
(2 pieces)
Remove Packing
(2 pieces)
Units without Optional I/O Board Units with Optional I/O Board
Figure 21. Remove the Packing Material
4. Remove the three shipping screws (Figure 22).
Shipping Screws (3)
Figure 22. Remove the Shipping Screws
5. Check for possible damage during shipment.

Installation
Setup Procedure
6. Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached.
7. Re-install the cover.
8. Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior.
Setup Procedure Use the following procedure to setup the instrument:
1. Connect the sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel
(Figure 23). Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty,
wet, or incompatible materials. All tubing should be constructed of
FEP Teflon, 316 stainless steel, borosilicate glass, or similar tubing
with an OD of 1/4-inch and a minimum ID of 1/8-inch. The length of
the tubing should be less than 10 feet.
Figure 23. Model 42i Rear Panel
Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument free of particulates. It may

be necessary to use the Teflon particulate filter as described in Teflon
Particulate Filter on page 9-12.

Installation
Setup Procedure
Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument at atmospheric pressure. It

may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement as
shown in Figure 24 if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure.
Vent to Exhaust Line at

Instrument Bulkhead
Atmospheric Pressure
SAMPLE
Input Gas Line
Figure 24. Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing
2. Connect the air dryer to the DRY AIR bulkhead.
3. Connect the EXHAUST bulkhead to a suitable vent or ozone scrubber.

The exhaust line should be 1/4-inch OD with a minimum ID of 1/8-
inch. The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet. Verify
that there is no restriction in this line.
4. Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector. For

detailed information about connecting to the instrument, refer to:
Connecting External Devices on page 2-5
Instrument Controls Menu > I/O Configuration on page 3-43
External Device Connection Components on page 7-6
Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9-13
For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection, refer to
Analog Output Testing on page 7-26.
5. Plug the instrument into an outlet of the appropriate voltage and

frequency.

Installation
Connecting External Devices
WARNING The Model 42i is supplied with a three-wire grounding cord.

Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated.
Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries
instruments.
External Devices
These connection options include:
Individual terminal board PCB assemblies
Terminal block and cable kits (optional)
Individual cables (optional)
For detailed information on the optional connection components, refer to
the Optional Equipment chapter. For associated part numbers, refer to
External Device Connection Components on page 7-6.
Terminal Board PCB The terminal board PCB assemblies are circuit boards with a D-Sub
Assemblies connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on the other side.
This assembly provide a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from
a data system to the analyzers I/O connectors.
The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for iSeries
instruments:
I/O terminal board PCB assembly, 37 pin (standard)
D/O terminal board PCB assembly, 37 pin (standard)
25-pin terminal board PCB assembly, (included with optional I/O
expansion board)
I/O Terminal Board Figure 25 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the
terminal board using the included tie-down and spacer. Table 21
identifies the connector pins and associated signals.
Note Not all of the I/O available in the instrument is brought out on the
supplied terminal board. If more I/O is desired, an alternative means of
connection is required. See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits.

Installation
See Detail B
See Detail A
Component Side Viewed from Top of Board
Detail A Detail B
Assembled Connector
Figure 25. I/O Terminal Board Views

Table 21. I/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions
Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description
1 Analog1 13 Power_Fail_NC
2 Analog ground 14 Power_Fail_COM
3 Analog2 15 Power_Fail_NO
4 Analog ground 16 TTL_Input1
5 Analog3 17 TTL_Input2
8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground
12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground

Installation
D/O Terminal Board Figure 26 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the
terminal board using the included tie-down and spacer. Table 22
identifies the connector pins and associated signals.
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Assembled Connector
Figure 26. D/O Terminal Board Views

Table 22. D/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions
1 Relay1_ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA
2 Relay1_ContactB 14 Relay7_ContactB
9 Relay5_ContactA 21 Solenoid_Drive_Output 1
10 Relay5_ContactB 22 +24V
11 Relay6_ContactA 23 Solenoid_Drive_Output 2
12 Relay6_ContactB 24 +24V

Installation
25-Pin Terminal Board The 25-pin terminal board is included with the optional I/O Expansion
Board.
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Assembled Connector
Figure 27. 25-Pin Terminal Board Views

Table 23. 25-Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions
1 IOut1 13 Analog_In1
2 Isolated ground 14 Analog_In2
4 Isolated ground 16 GNDD
11 IOut6 23 GNDD

Installation
Startup
Startup Use the following procedure when starting the instrument.
1. Turn the power ON.
2. Allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize.
Note it is best to turn the ozonator on and let the instrument run
overnight before calibration in order to obtain the most accurate
information.
3. Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times

to appropriate settings. For more information about instrument
parameters, see the Operation chapter.
4. Before beginning the actual monitoring, perform a multipoint

calibration as described in the Calibration chapter.

Chapter 3
Operation
This chapter describes the front panel display, front panel pushbuttons, and
menu-driven software. For details, see the following topics:
Display on page 3-1
Pushbuttons on page 3-2
Firmware Overview on page 3-4
Range Menu on page 3-8
Averaging Time on page 3-16
Calibration Factors Menu on page 3-17
Calibration Menu on page 3-20
Instrument Controls Menu on page 3-21
Diagnostics Menu on page 3-58
Alarms Menu on page 3-66
Service Menu on page 3-75
Password Menu on page 3-92
Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid-crystal display (LCD) shows the sample
concentrations, instrument parameters, instrument controls, help, and error
messages. Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one
time. For these menus, use and to move the cursor up and
down to each item.

Operation
Pushbuttons
Figure 31. Front Panel Display
CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks, do not let the liquid crystal contact
your skin or clothes. If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes, wash
it off immediately using soap and water.
Pushbuttons The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens/menus.
Figure 32. Front Panel Pushbuttons

Operation
Pushbuttons
Table 31 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions.

Table 31. Front Panel Pushbuttons
Key Name Function
= Soft Keys The (soft keys) are used to provide shortcuts that
allow the user to jump to user-selectable menu screens. For
more information on processing soft keys, see Soft Keys
below.
= Run The is used to display the Run screen. The Run
screen normally displays the NO, NO2, and NOx
concentrations.
= Menu The is used to display the Main Menu when in the
Run screen, or back up one level in the menu system. For
more information about the Main Menu, see Main Menu
later in this chapter.
= Help The is context-sensitive, that is, it provides
additional information about the screen that is being
displayed. Press for a brief explanation about the
current screen or menu. Help messages are displayed using
lower case letters to easily distinguish them from the
operating screens. To exit a help screen, press or
to return to the previous screen, or to
return to the Run screen.
= Up, Down The four arrow pushbuttons ( , , , and
= Left, Right ) move the cursor up, down, left, and right or
change values and states in specific screens.
= Enter The is used to select a menu item, accept/set/save
a change, and/or toggle on/off functions.
Soft Keys The soft keys are multi-functional keys that use part of the display to
identify their function. The function of the soft keys is to provide a
shortcut to the most often used menus and screens. They are located
directly underneath the display, and user-defined labels in the lower part of
the display indicate the function of each key at that time.
To change a soft key, place the menu cursor > on the item of the selected
menu or screen you wish to set. Press followed by the selected soft
key within 1 second of pressing the right-arrow key. The edit soft key
prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label.
Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys. If a particular menu
or screen item cannot be assigned, the key assignment screen will not come
up upon entering right-arrow-soft key combinations. All items under the
Service menu (including the menu itself) cannot be assigned soft keys.

Operation
Firmware Overview
EDIT SOFT KEY PROMPT:

CURRENTLY:RANGE
RANGE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE
RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM
Alphanumeric Entry The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters,
Screen numbers, and other characters. The cursor may be positioned within the
entry line using the and keys. If a character is entered over an
existing character, that character will be overwritten. Use the and
keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to
move within the keyboard. To select a character to add to the string, use
the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character, and then
press the key to add that character to the entry line.
On the right side of the keyboard are special functions. BKSP is used to
move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left, deleting the
character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or
to the right of the cursor one place to the left. PAGE is used to change the
keyboard character page. For the English language, this switches between
upper and lower-case alphabetic characters. SAVE stores the string from the
entry line into the parameter. Alternately, if the active cursor is moved to
the entry line, may be pressed to store the string from the entry line
into the parameter.
Entry Line ANGE ANGE

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP abcdefghijklmn BKSP
Keyboard OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE opqrstuvwxyz PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE 0123456789 ./- SAVE
RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM
Firmware The Model 42i utilizes the menu-driven firmware as illustrated by the
flowchart in Figure 33. The Power-Up screen, shown at the top of the
Overview flowchart, is displayed each time the instrument is turned on. This screen is
displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self-checks.
After the warm-up period, the Run screen is automatically displayed. The
Run screen is the normal operating screen. It displays the NO, NO2, and
NOx concentrations, depending on operating mode. From the Run screen,
the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing . The Main Menu
contains a list of submenus. Each submenu contains related instrument
settings. This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail. Refer to
the appropriate sections for more information.

Thermo Fisher Scientific
Powerup
Screen
Self Test
Screen
Run Screen
Main Menu
Averaging Calibration Instrument

Range Calibration Diagnostics Alarms Service Password
Time Factors Controls
Gas Units Avg Time NO Bkg Cal NO Bkg Ozonator Program Version Alarms Detected PMT Voltage Adj Set Password
NO Range NOX Bkg Cal NOX Bkg PMT Supply Voltages Internal Temp Range Mode Select Lock Instrument
NO2 Range NO Coef Cal NO Coef Auto/Man Mode Temps Chamber Temp Conv Set Temp Change Password
NOX Range NO2 Coef Cal NO2 Coef Datalogging Settings Pressure Cooler Temp Pressure Cal Remove Password
Set Custom Ranges NOX Coef Cal NOX Coef Comm Settings Flow Conv Temp Flow Cal Unlock Instrument
Cal Pressure Cal Pressure I/O Config Analog Input Readings Pressure Input Bd Cal
Gas Units Hi Avg Time Reset User Cal Defaults Zero/Span Check Temp Compensation Analog Input Voltages Flow Temp Cal
Hi NO Range Lo Avg Time Pres Compensation Digital Inputs Ozonator Flow Analog Output Cal
Lo NO Range NO Bkg Cal NO Bkg Screen Contrast Relay States Zero Check Analog Input Cal
Hi NO2 Range NOX Bkg Cal NOX Bkg Service Mode Test Analog Outputs Span Check Ozonator Safety
Lo NO2 Range Hi NO Coef Cal Hi NO Coef Date/Time Instrument Config Zero Autocal Extended Ranges
Hi NOX Range Hi NO2 Coef Cal Hi NO2 Coef Contact Info Span Autocal Dilution Ratio
Lo NOX Range Hi NOX Coef Cal Hi NOX Coef NO2Conc Display Pixel Test
Set Custom Ranges Lo NO Coef Cal Lo NO Coef NOX Conc Restore User Defaults
Lo NO2 Coef Cal Lo NO2 Coef NO Conc
Lo NOX Coef Cal Lo NOX Coef MB Status
For Dual or Auto Range Only
Figure 33. Flowchart of Menu-Driven Software

Cal Pressure Cal Pressure Int. Bd. Status
Reset User Cal Defaults I/O Exp. Bd. Status
Model 42i Instruction Manual

3-5
Firmware Overview
Operation
Operation
Firmware Overview
Power-Up Screen The Power-Up screen is displayed when power is applied to the Model 42i.
This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and
diagnostic checks are being performed.
Please wait while booting...
Run Screen The Run screen displays the NO, NO2, and NOx concentrations. The
status bar displays the time (24-hour format), the password (lock) icon,
service (wrench) icon, alarm (bell) icon, and optional zero/span sample
solenoid valve status, if installed.
Status Bar Icons

The password (lock) icon indicates that
The alarm (bell) icon indicates
no parameter changes can be made from
that an alarm is active.
the front panel.
The service (wrench) icon indicates that the

instrument is in the service mode.
The word SAMPLE on the left of the status bar indicates the analyzer has
the span/zero valve option and is in SAMPLE mode. Other modes
appear in the same area of the display as ZERO or SPAN. For more
information about the optional solenoid valves, see Chapter 9, Optional
Equipment.

Operation
Firmware Overview
When operating in dual or auto range mode two sets of coefficients are
used to calculate the NO-NO2-NOx High and Low concentrations.
Also, two averaging times are usedone for each range. The title bar
indicates which range concentrations are displayed. The words LOW
RANGE CONCENTRATION on the top of the display indicates that
the low concentration is displayed. In dual range mode, pressing the
and arrows will toggle between high and low concentrations. The
example below shows the Run screen in single range mode.
Title Bar X CONCENTRATION W

Gas Concentraton
NO 62.7 PPB 28.7 PPB
Gas Type NO2 25.5 PPB Gas Units
NOx 88.2 PPB 29.2 PPB
Status Bar SAMPLE 12:34 ALARMx Status Bar Icons
Programmable Soft Key Labels
Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus. Instrument parameters
and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to
their function. The concentration appears above the Main Menu and
submenus in every screen. The Service menu is visible only when the
instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode,
see Service Mode later in this chapter.
Use and to move the cursor up and down.
Press to make a selection.
Press to return to the Main Menu or to return to the Run
screen.

Operation
Range Menu
XXLO WCONCENTRATIONXXLO W
NO 62.7 PPB
NO2 25.5 PPB
NOx 88.2 PPB
xSAMPLE 12:34 x
MAIN MENU:
>RANGE
AVERAGING TIME
CALIBRATION FACTORS
CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENT CONTROLS
DIAGNOSTICS
ALARMS
SERVICE
PASSWORD
Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units, NO-NO2-NOx
ranges, and to set the custom ranges. The screens below show the range
menu in single range mode and dual/auto range modes. The only
difference between the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate
which range is displayed. For more information about the single, dual and
auto range modes, see Single Range Mode, Dual Range Mode, and
Auto Range Mode below.
In the Main Menu, choose Range
RANGE: RANGE:
>GAS UNITS PPB >GAS UNITS PPB
NO RANGE 50 HI NO RANGE 500
NO2 RANGE 50 LO NO RANGE 50
NOx RANGE 50 HI NO2 RANGE 500
SETCUSTOM RANGES LO NO2 RANGE 50
HI NOx RANGE 500

LO NOx RANGE 50
SET CUSTOM RANGES
Single Range Mode In the single range mode, the NO, NO2, and NOx channels each have one
range, one averaging time, and one span coefficient.
By default, the three analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel
connector as shown in Figure 34. See Table 32 for channels and pin

Operation
Range Menu
connections. Single range mode may be selected from the Range Mode
Select on page 3-76.
Figure 34. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode

Table 32. Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode
Channel Connector Pin I/O Terminal Pin Description
1 14 1 NO Analog Output
2 33 3 NO2 Analog Output
3 15 5 NOx Analog Output
4 34 7 None
5 17 9 None
6 36 11 None
Ground 16, 18, 19, 35, 37 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Signal Ground
Note All channels are user definable. If any customization has been made
to the analog output configuration, the default selections may not apply.
Dual Range Mode In the dual range mode, there are two independent analog outputs. These
are labeled simply as the High Range and the Low Range. Each
channel has its own analog output range, averaging time, and span
coefficient.
This enables the sample concentration reading to be sent to the analog
outputs at two different ranges. For example, the low NO analog output

Operation
Range Menu
can be set to output concentrations from 0 to 50 ppb and the high NO

analog output set to output concentrations from 0 to 500 ppb.
In addition to each channel having two ranges, each channel has two span
coefficients. There are two span coefficients so that each range can be
calibrated separately. This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one
another. For example, the low NO range is set to 050 ppb and the high
NO range is set to 020,000 ppb.
By default, in the dual range mode, the analog outputs are arranged on the
rear panel connector as shown in Figure 35. See Table 33 for channels
and pin connections. Dual range mode may be selected from the Range
Mode Select on page 3-76.
Figure 35. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode

Table 33. Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode
1 14 1 NO High Range
2 33 3 NO Low Range
3 15 5 NO2 High Range
4 34 7 NO2 Low Range
5 17 9 NOx High Range
6 36 11 NOx Low Range

Operation
Range Menu
Auto Range Mode The auto range mode switches the NO, NO2, and NOx analog outputs
between high and low ranges, depending on the NOx concentration level.
The high and low ranges are defined in the Range menu.
For example, suppose the low range is set to 20 ppb and the high range is
set to 100 ppb (Figure 36). Sample concentrations below 50 ppb are
presented to the low ranges analog outputs and sample concentrations
above 50 ppb are presented to the high ranges analog outputs. When the
low range is active, the status output is at 0 volts. When the high range is
active, the status output is at half of full-scale.
When the high ranges are active, the NOx concentration must drop to 95%
of the low NOx range for the low ranges to become active.
In addition to each channel having two ranges, each channel has two span
coefficients. There are two span coefficients so that each range can be
calibrated separately. This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one
another. For example, the low NO range is set to 050 ppb and the high
NO range is set to 020,000 ppb.
Figure 36. Analog Output in Auto Range Mode

Operation
Range Menu
By default, in the auto range mode, the analog outputs are arranged on the
rear panel connector as shown in Figure 37. See Table 34 for channels
and pin connections. Auto range mode may be selected from the Range
Mode Select on page 3-76.
Figure 37. Pin-Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode

Table 34. Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode
1 14 1 NO Analog Output
2 33 3 NO2 Analog Output
3 15 5 NOx Analog Output
4 34 7 Range Status:
half-scale = high range
zero scale = low range
5 17 9 None
6 36 11 None

Operation
Range Menu
Gas Units The Gas Units screen defines how the NO, NO2, and NOx concentration
readings are expressed. Gas units of parts per billion (ppb), parts per
million (ppm), micrograms per cubic meter (g/m3), or milligrams per
cubic meter (mg/m3) are available. The g/m3 and mg/m3 gas
concentration modes are calculated using a standard pressure of 760
mmHg and a standard temperature of 20 C.
When switching the selected units from ppb or ppm to g/m3 or mg/m3,
the analog ranges all default to the highest range in that mode. For
example, when switching from mg/m3 to ppm, all the ranges default to 20
ppm. Therefore, whenever you change units, you should also check the
range settings.
In the Main Menu, choose Range > Gas Units.
Note If the units change from ppb/ppm to g/m3/mg/m3 or vice versa, the
instrument should be re-calibrated, particularly if the users standard
temperature is different from 20 C. A display warning will appear that
ranges will be defaulted and calibration parameters reset.
GAS UNITS:
CURRENTLY: PPB
SET TO: UG/M3 ?
AND SET RANGES AND CAL TOX
DEFAULT SETTINGSXXXXXXXXXX
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
NO, NO2, and NOx The NO, NO2, and NOx Ranges screen defines the concentration range of
Ranges the analog outputs. For example, a NO2 range of 050 ppb restricts the
NO2 analog output to concentrations between 0 and 50 ppb.
The display shows the current NO, NO2, or NOx range. The next line of
the display is used to change the range. The range screen is similar for the
single, dual, and auto range modes. The only difference between the
screens are the words High and Low to indicate which range is
displayed. The example below shows the NO range screen in single mode.
For more information about the dual and auto range modes, see Single
Range Mode, Dual Range Mode, and Auto Range Mode earlier in
this chapter.

Operation
Range Menu
Table 35 lists the available operating ranges. Table 36 lists the extended
ranges. When switching from standard to extended ranges, the PMT
voltage must be readjusted. For more information about readjusting the
PMT voltage, see Chapter 7, Servicing.
In the Main Menu, choose Range > NO, NO2, or NOx Range.
NO RANGE:
CURRENTLY: 50
SET TO: 100 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Table 35. Standard Ranges

ppb ppm gm3 mgm3
50 0.05 100 0.1
100 0.10 200 0.2
200 0.20 500 0.5
500 0.50 1,000 1.0
1,000 1.00 2,000 2.0
2,000 2.00 5,000 5.0
5,000 5.00 10,000 10.0
10,000 10.00 20,000 20.0
20,000 20.00 30,000 30.0
C1 C1 C1 C1
C2 C2 C2 C2
C3 C3 C3 C3

Operation
Range Menu
Table 36. Extended Ranges

ppb ppm gm3 mgm3
200 0.2 500 0.5
500 0.5 1,000 1
1,000 1 2,000 2
2,000 2 5,000 5
5,000 5 10,000 10
10,000 10 20,000 20
20,000 20 50,000 50
50,000 50 100,000 100
100,000 100 150,000 150
C1 C1 C1 C1
C2 C2 C2 C2
C3 C3 C3 C3
C1, C2, and C3 are custom ranges. For more information about custom
ranges, see Set Custom Ranges below.
Set Custom Ranges The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges, which are user-
defined. In the standard range mode, any value between 50 ppb (0.05
ppm) and 20,000 ppb (20 ppm) can be specified as a range. In the g/m3
(mg/m3) mode, any value between 100 g/m3 (0.1 mg/m3) and 30,000
g/m3 (30 mg/m3) can be specified as a range. In the extended range mode,
any value between 200 ppb (0.02 ppm) and 100,000 ppb (100 ppm) can
be specified as a range. In the g/m3 (mg/m3) mode, any value between 500
g/m3 (0.5 mg/m3) and 150,000 g/m3 (150 mg/m3) can be specified as a
range.
In the Main Menu, choose Range > Set Custom Ranges.
CUSTOM RANGES:
>CUSTOM RANGE 1 55.6
CUSTOM RANGE 2 75.0
CUSTOM RANGE 3 125.0

Operation
Averaging Time
Custom Ranges The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges.
The display shows the current custom range. The next line of the display is
used to set the range. To use the custom full-scale range, be sure to select it
(Custom range 1, 2, or 3) in the NO, NO2, or NOx Ranges screen. For
more information about selecting ranges, see NO, NO2, and NOx
Ranges above.
In the Main Menu, choose Range > Set Custom Ranges > Custom
Range 1, 2, or 3.
CUSTOM RANGE 1:
CURRENTLY: 55.6
SET TO: 000055.7 ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Averaging Time The Averaging Time defines a time period (10 to 300 seconds) over which
NO, NO2, and NOx measurements are taken. The average concentration of
the NO, NO2, and NOx readings are calculated for that time period. The
front panel display and analog outputs are updated every 10 seconds for
averaging times between 10 and 300 seconds. An averaging time of 10
seconds, for example, means that the average concentration of the last 10
seconds will be output at each update. An averaging time of 300 seconds
means that the moving average concentration of the last 300 seconds will
be output at each update. Therefore, the lower the averaging time the faster
the front panel display and analog outputs respond to concentration
changes. Longer averaging times are typically used to smooth output data.
The Averaging Time screen for the single range mode is shown below. In
the dual and auto range modes, an Averaging Time Menu is displayed
before the averaging time screens. This additional menu is needed because
the dual and auto range modes have two averaging times (high and low).
The Averaging Time screen functions the same way in the single, dual, and
auto range modes. The following averaging times are available: 10, 20, 30,
60, 90, 120, 180, 240, and 300 seconds. Additional averaging times are
available in NO and NOx modes: 1, 2, and 5 seconds. For more
information about the manual mode, see Auto/Manual Mode later in this
chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Averaging Time.

Operation
Calibration Factors Menu
AVERAGING TIME:
CURRENTLY: 30 SEC
SET TO: 10 SEC ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Calibration Factors Calibration factors are used to correct the NO, NO2, and NOx
concentration readings that the instrument generates using its own internal
Menu calibration data. The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration
factors. The screens below show the calibration factors menu in single
mode and dual/auto range modes. The only difference between the screens
are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed.
Normally, the calibration factors are calculated automatically using the
functions described in Calibration menu later in this chapter. However,
the calibration factors can also be set manually using the functions in this
menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors.
CALIBRATION FACTORS: CALIBRATION FACTORS:

>NO BKG 0.0 >NO BKG 0.0
NOx BKG 0.0 NOx BKG 0.0
NO COEF 1.000 HI NO COEF 1.000
NO2 COEF 1.000 HI NO2 COEF 1.000
NOx COEF 1.000 HI NOx COEF 1.000
RESET USER CAL DEFAULTS LO NO COEF 1.000

LO NO2 COEF 1.000
LO NOx COEF 1.000
RESET USER CAL DEFAULTS
NO and NOx Backgrounds The NO and NOx background corrections are determined during zero
calibration. The NO background is the amount of signal read by the
analyzer in the NO channel while sampling zero air. The NOx background
is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NOx channel while
sampling zero air. Although the background is expressed in terms of
concentration, the background signal is actually the combination of
electrical offsets, PMT dark currents, and trace substances undergoing
chemiluminescence. Before the analyzer sets the NO and NOx readings to
zero, it stores these values as the NO and NOx background corrections,
respectively. The NO2 background correction is determined from the NO

Operation
and NOx background corrections and is not displayed. The background

corrections are typically below 15 ppb.
The NO and NOx Background screens are used to perform a manual zero
calibration of the instrument. Before performing a manual zero adjustment,
allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable readings are obtained. The
NO channel should be calibrated first. Both the NO and NOx Background
screens operate the same way. Therefore, the following description of the
NO background applies to the NOx background screen as well. The first
line of the display shows the current NO reading. The second line of the
display shows the NO background correction that is stored in memory.
The NO background correction is a value, expressed in the current gas
units, that is subtracted from the NO reading to produce the NO reading
that is displayed.
In the example below, the analyzer is displayed 4.4 ppb of NO while
sampling zero air. A background correction is 0.0 ppb means that 0 ppb is
being subtracted from the NO concentration being displayed. Therefore,
the background correction must be increased to 4.4 ppb in order for the
NO reading to be at 0 ppb, that is, a NO reading of 4.4 ppb minus a NO
background reading of 4.4 ppb gives the corrected NO reading of 0 ppb.
To set the NO reading in the following example to zero, use to
increment the NO background correction to 4.4 ppb. As the NO
background correction is increased, the NO concentration is decreased.
Note that at this point, pressing and has no affect on the
analog outputs or the stored NO background correction of 0.0 ppb. A
question mark following both the NO reading and the NO background
correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to
implemented changes. To escape this screen without saving any changes,
press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or to return
to the Run screen. Press to actually set the NO reading to 0 ppb and
store the new background correction of 4.4 ppb. Then the question mark
prompt beside the NO reading disappears.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors > NO or NOx Bkg.
NO BACKGROUND:
NO: 4.4
SET BKG TO: 0.00 ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE

Operation
NO, NO2, and NOx The NO, NO2, and NOx span coefficients are usually calculated by the
Coefficients instrument processor during calibration. The span coefficients are used to
correct the NO, NO2, and NOx readings. The NO and NOx span
coefficients normally has a value near 1.000. The NO2 span coefficient
normally has a value between 0.95 and 1.050.
The NO, NO2, and NOx Coefficient screens allow the NO, NO2, and
NOx span coefficients to be manually changed while sampling span gas of
known concentration. The NO, NO2, and NOx Coefficient screens operate
the same way. Therefore, the following description of the NO coefficient
screen applies to the NO2, and NOx coefficient screens as well.
The display shows the current NO concentration reading. The next line of
the display shows the NO span coefficient that is stored in memory and is
being used to correct the NO concentration. Notice that as the span
coefficient value is changed, the current NO concentration reading on the
above line also changes. However, no actual changes are made to the value
stored in memory until is pressed. Only proposed changes, as
indicated by a question mark prompt, are displayed until is pressed.
In dual or auto range modes, HIGH or LOW is displayed to indicate
the calibration of the high or low coefficient. The example below shows the
coefficient screen in dual/auto range mode.
Note The screen will show SPAN CONC NOT VALID if the
coefficient change causes the concentration to be either higher than the
selected range or less than or equal to zero.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors > NO, NO2, or NOx
Coef.
NO COEFFICIENT:
NO: 51.4
SET COEF TO: 1.000
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Reset User Calibration The Reset User Calibration Defaults screen allows the user to reset the
Defaults calibration factors to factory defaults.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors > Reset User Cal
Defaults.

Operation
Calibration Menu
RESTORE DEFAULT CAL: RESTORE DEFAULT CAL:
RESTORE RESTORE
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO?x
PRESS TO CONFIRM RESTORE
Calibration Menu The Calibration menu is used to automatically set the zero background of
NO and NOx, and the NO, NO2, and NOx span coefficients. The screens
below show the calibration menu in single mode and dual/auto range
modes. The zero/span check is visible only if the zero/span option is
installed.
The calibration procedure is the same in dual, auto, or single range,
however, there are two sets of gas coefficients in dual or auto range (i.e. low
and high coefficients). This enables each range to be calibrated separately.
When calibrating the instrument in dual or auto range, be sure to use a low
span gas to calibrate the low range and a high span gas to calibrate the high
range.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration.
CALIBRATION: CALIBRATION:
>CAL NO BACKGROUND >CAL NO BACKGROUND
CAL NOx BACKGROUND CAL NOx BACKGROUND
CAL NO COEFFICIENT CAL HI NO COEFFICIENT
CAL NO2 COEFFICIENT CAL HI NO2 COEFFICENT
CAL NOx COEFFICIENT CAL HI NOx COEFFICIENT
ZERO/SPAN CHECK CAL LO NO COEFFICIENT

CAL HI NO2 COEFFICENT
CAL HI NOx COEFFICENT
ZERO/SPAN CHECK
Calibrate NO and NOx The Calibrate NO and NOx Background screens are used to adjust the
Backgrounds instrument zero, or background. Before making an adjustment, be sure the
analyzer samples zero air until the readings stabilize. The display shows the
current NO or NOx reading.
It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating. The longer the
averaging time, the more accurate the calibration will be. To be most

Operation
Calibration Menu
accurate, use the 300-second averaging time. For more information about
calibration, see Chapter 4, Calibration.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Calibrate NO or NOx
Background.
NO BACKGROUND:
NO: 1.2
CURRENTLY: 0.00 ?
SET CO TO ZERO
Calibrate NO, NO2, and The Calibrate NO Coefficient screen is used to adjust the NO span
NOx Coefficients concentration while sampling span gas of known concentration. All
calibration screens operate the same way. Therefore, the following
description of the NO calibration screen applies to the NO2 and NOx
calibration screens as well.
The display shows the current NO concentration reading and the current
NO range. The next line of the display is where the NO calibration gas
concentration is entered.
It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating. The longer the
averaging time, the more accurate the calibration will be. To be most
accurate, use the 300-second averaging time. For more information about
calibration, see Chapter 4, Calibration.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Cal NO, NO2 or NOx
Coefficient.
CALIBRATE NO:
NO: 25.5
SPAN CONC: 0001.000 ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Zero/Span Check The Zero/Span Check menu is available only if the zero/span valve option
is installed. It is used to program the instrument to perform fully
automated zero and span checks or adjustments.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check.

Operation
Calibration Menu
ZERO/SPAN CHECK:
>NEXT TIME 01Jan06 12:00
PERIOD HR 24
TOTAL DURATION HR 1.5
ZERO DURATION MIN 30
SPAN DURATION MIN 30
PURGE DURATION MIN 30

ZERO/SPAN AVG SEC 60
ZERO CAL RESET ON
SPAN CAL RESET OFF
ZERO/SPAN RATIO 1
Next Time The Next Time screen is used to view and set the initial date and time (24-
hour format) of the zero/span check. Once the initial zero/span check is
performed, the date and time of the next zero/span check is calculated and
displayed.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check > Next
Time.
NEXT DATE AND TIME: NEXT DATE AND TIME:

19 MAR 2007 12:34 19 MAR 2007 12:34 ?
PRESS TO EDIT SETTING: DAYS
SET MONTHS
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Period Hours The Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between zero/span
checks. Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable. To turn the
zero/span check off, set the period to 0.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check > Period
HR.
ZERO/SPAN PERIOD:
CURRENTLY: 024 HRS
SET TO: 025 HRS ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE

Operation
Calibration Menu
Total Duration Hour The Total Duration Hour line is the sum of the zero, span, and purge
duration minutes, and is for viewing only.
Zero/Span/Purge The Zero Duration Minutes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by
Duration Minutes the instrument. The Span and Purge Duration Minutes screens look and
function the same way as the zero duration screen. The span duration
screen is used to set how long the span gas is sampled by the instrument.
The purge duration screen is used to set how long the purge period will be
after doing a zero or span check. This gives the instrument time to flush
out the zero and span gas before any meaningful data is taken. Logged data
is flagged as taken during a purge to show that the data is suspect.
Durations between 0 and 99 minutes are acceptable. Each time a zero/span
check occurs the zero check is done first, followed by the span check. To
perform just a zero check, set the span duration to 0 (off). The same applies
to perform just a span check.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check > Zero,
Span or Purge Duration Min.
ZERO DURATION:
CURRENTLY: 30 MIN
SET TO: 31 MIN ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Zero/Span Averaging The Zero/Span Averaging Time screen allows the user to set the zero/span
Time averaging time. The zero/span averaging time is used by the analyzer only
when performing an automatic zero or span check or adjustment. The
analyzers averaging time is used for all other functions. The following
averaging times are available: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
and 300 seconds.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check >
Zero/Span Avg Sec.

Operation
Instrument Controls Menu
ZERO/SPAN AVERAGING TIME:

CURRENTLY: 60 SEC
SET TO: 90 SEC ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Zero/Span Calibration Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes
Reset or no when selected, and are displayed only if Auto Calibration is set to
YES in the Instrument Configuration screen in the Diagnostics menu.
If the zero calibration reset line is set to yes, then not only is a zero check
done, but a zero adjustment is made. If the span calibration reset line is set
to yes, then not only is a span check done, but a span adjustment is made.
(This is how to set up a scheduled, recurring auto calibration.)
Zero/Span Ratio The Zero/Span Ratio screen is used to set the ratio of zero checks to span
checks. For example, if this value is set to 1, a span check will follow every
zero check. If this value is set to 3, there will be three zero checks between
each span check. This value may be set from 1 to 10, with 1 as default.
In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check >
Zero/Span Ratio.
ZERO/SPAN RATIO:
CURRENTLY: 1:1
SET TO: 2:1 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Instrument Controls The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items that may be
selected to control various instrument operational parameters. The software
Menu controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument
functions.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls.

Operation
INSTRUMENT CONTROLS:
>OZONATOR
PMT SUPPLY
AUTO/MANUAL MODE
DATALOGGING SETTINGS
COMMUNICATION SETTINGS
I/O CONFIGURATION
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
PRESSURE COMPENSATION
SCREEN CONTRAST
SERVICE MODE
DATE/TIME
TIMEZONE
Ozonator The Ozonator screen is used to turn the internal ozonator on or off. The
display shows the status of the control line that turns the ozonator on or
off. The next line of the display shows the user-specified ozonator setting.
Under most conditions, the control line status and ozonator set status are
the same. However, as a safety precaution, the microprocessor can override
the user-specified ozonator setting. This occurs only if the ozonator flow
doesnt indicate any flow or if the NO2 converter temperature is below the
minimum alarm limit. In this case, an alarm is activated and the ozonator is
turned off. This is done to prevent the ozonator from overheating, which
will result in permanent damage to the ozonator, or if the converter
temperature drops below the minimum limit, which reduces the
effectiveness of the ozone destruct.
It is possible, however, to override the ozonator shut-off due to converter
temperature being out of range, by setting the ozonator safety OFF in the
Service Mode.
Note The ozonator must be ON to obtain NO, NO2, and NOx

readings. As an additional safety precaution, a lit LED mounted on the
measurement interface board indicates that the ozonator is on.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Ozonator.
OZONATOR:
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE

Operation
PMT Supply The PMT Supply screen is used to turn the PMT power supply on or off.
This is useful in a troubleshooting situation.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > PMT Supply.
PMT SUPPLY:
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE
Auto/Manual Mode The Auto/Manual Mode screen allows selection of the automatic mode
(NO/NOx), NO mode (manual NO), or NOx mode (manual NOx). The
auto cycle mode switches the mode solenoid valve automatically on a 10
second cycle so that NO, NO2, and NOx concentrations are determined.
The manual NO mode puts the mode solenoid valve into the open position
so that the sample gas bypasses the NO2-to-NO converter. Therefore, only
the NO concentration is determined. The manual NOx mode puts the
mode solenoid valve into the closed position so that the sample gas passes
through the NO2-to-NO converter. Therefore, only the NOx concentration
is determined. In the manual modes, additional averaging times of 1, 2,
and 5 seconds are available from the Averaging Times screen.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Auto/Manual
Mode.
MODE:
CURRENTLY: MANUAL NO
SET TO: NO/NOX ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Datalogging Settings The iSeries instruments include a built-in datalogging capability as a

standard feature. The operator is allowed to create two different types of
records, which for historical reasons, are named lrecs and srecs. Each record
can contain up to 32 different fields, or data items, and records can be
created at user-defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes.

Operation
Record generation is tied to the instruments real-time clock. For example,

if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes, a new srec will be
generated on every hour and every half hour (10:00, 10:30, 11:00 ).
Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other. For example, an srec
containing just the current concentration level could be generated every five
minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be
generated once every hour.
The analyzer's computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory
which is enough to store a full lrec containing 32 data items and a full srec
containing 32 items once each minute for a week (>20,000 total records).
If logging is limited to the minimum content of date, time, concentration
and error flags, the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months
(>190,000 total records).
The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is
stored and recorded.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Datalogging
Settings.
DATALOGGING SETTINGS:
>SELECT SREC/LREC SREC
VIEW LOGGED DATA
ERASE LOG
SELECT CONTENT
COMMIT CONTENT
RESET TO DEFAULT CONTENT

CONFIGURE DATALOGGING
Select Srec/Lrec The Select Srec/Lrec screen is used to select the log record type for other
operations in this menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Datalogging Settings
> Select Srec/Lrec.
SELECT LOG TYPE:

CURRENTLY: SREC
SET TO: LREC ?
TOGGLE VALUE

Operation
View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view
the logged data by the number of records or by date and time. Note that
both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time, only the selected
record type.
> View Logged Data.
SELECT START POINT BY:
SET TO: # OF RECS
CHANGE ACCEPT
Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the number of records to
view, ending with the most recent. It also shows the total number of
records that have been logged for the selected record type.
SET # BACK FROM CURRENT:

0000000
TOTAL LRECS: 20
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
The Record Display screen (read only) displays the selected records.
time date flags

10:01 01/20/07 FC0088900
10:02 01/20/07 FC0088900
10:03 01/20/07 FC0088900
10:04 01/20/07 FC0088900
PGUP/DN PAN L/R
Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to
view logged data. For example, if 20 Jan 2007 10:00 is entered, then the

Operation
first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time. If
set to one minute logging, this would be at 20 Jan 2007 10:01.
DATE AND TIME:

20 JAN 2007 10:00
CHG DAYS
SET CURSOR TO MONTHS
ACCEPT AS SHOWN
The Record Display screen (read only) displays the selected records.
time date flags

10:01 01/20/07 FC0088900
10:02 01/20/07 FC0088900
10:03 01/20/07 FC0088900
10:04 01/20/07 FC0088900
PGUP/DN PAN L/R
Erase Log The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record
type only (not both srecs and lrecs).
> Erase Log.
ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA? ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA?
ERASE ERASE
PRESS TO CONFIRM ERASURE
Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to
configure the data to be logged. When a field is selected, a submenu list
appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields. Item types are
Concentrations, Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O
expansion board is installed). These record fields comprise a temporary list
of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the

Operation
datalogging menu before the changes will apply. Note that committing any
changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the selected record
type only, as the format of the stored data is changed.
> Select Content.
LREC FIELDS:
>FIELD 1 NO
FIELD 2 NOX
FIELD 3 PRES
FIELD 4 PMTT
FIELD 5 INTT
Choose Field Data The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can
be logged for the current field. Choices are Concentrations, Other
Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board is installed).
> Select Content > Field 132.
DATA IN SREC FIELD 1:

>CONCENTRATIONS
OTHER MEASUREMENTS
ANALOG INPUTS
Note The ANALOG INPUTS item is only displayed if the I/O expansion
board option is intalled.
Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the
concentrations to the selected record field. The selected item is shown by
<-- after it. Note that at this point, pressing indicates that these are
proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To change the
selected record format and erase record log file data, see Commit
Content below. Range (NOx) is only visible in auto range mode.
> Select Content > select Field > Concentrations.

Operation
CONCENTRATIONS:
>NONE
NO <--
NO2
NOx
LO NO
LO NO2
LO NOx
HI NO
HI NO2
HI NOx
RANGE (NOX)
Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other
available measurement types to the selected record field. The selected item
is shown by <-- after it. Note that at this point, pressing indicates
that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To
change the selected record format and erase record log file data, see
Commit Content below. BKG and COEF items are displayed only if
Ouput Conc Cal option is set to YES in the Instrument Configuration
screen.
> Select Content > select Field > Other Measurements.
OTHER MEASUREMENTS:
>NONE
INT TEMP
CHAMBER TEMP
COOLER TEMP
NO2 CNV TEMP
PERM OVN GAS

PERM OVN HTR
CHAMBER PRES
FLOW
PMT VOLTS
NO BKG
NOx BKG
LO NO COEF
LO NO2 COEF
LO NOx COEF
HI NO COEF
HI NO2 COEF
HI NOx COEF
OZONATOR FLOW
EXT ALARMS

Operation
Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the parameter (none or
analog inputs 18) to the selected record field. The selected item is shown
by <-- after it. Note that at this point, pressing indicates that these
are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To change the
selected record format and erase record log file data, see Commit
Content below. The analog inputs 18 will not show if the Ouput Conc
Cal option is set to YES in the Instrument Configuration screen.
> Select Content > select Field > Analog Inputs.
ANALOG INPUTS:
>NONE
ANALOG IN 1
ANALOG IN 2
ANALOG IN 3
ANALOG IN 4
Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been
made to any of the record fields for the selected record type. Saving changes
will erase record log file data for that record type. If no changes have been
made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST! will appear. For more
information about selecting the content of logged data fields, see Select
Content above.
> Commit Content.
CHANGE LREC DATA AND CHANGE LREC DATA AND

COMMIT COMMIT
PRESS TO CONFIRM ERASURE
Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging
field items to default values for the selected record type. For more
information about selecting the content of logged data fields, see Select
Content above.

Operation

> Reset to Default Content.
RESET LREC DATA AND RESET LREC DATA AND

RESET RESET
PRESS TO CONFIRM RESETxx
Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for
the currently selected record type.
> Configure Datalogging.
DATALOGGING SETTINGS:
>LOGGING PERIOD MIN 60
MEMORY ALLOCATION % 50
DATA TREATMENT AVG
Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in
minutes for the selected record format (srec or lrec). List of choices include:
off, 1, 5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes (default).
> Configure Datalogging > Logging Period Min.
SET PERIOD FOR SREC:

CURRENTLY: 60 MIN
SET TO: OFF MIN ?
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of
Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type (lrecs or srecs).

Operation
Percentages between 0 and 100% are available in increments of 10.

Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records, and
changing the percent allocated to one record type will automatically change
the other.
> Configure Datalogging > Memory Allocation %.
SET PERCENT LRECS: SET PERCENT LRECS:

CURRENTLY: 50% CURRENTLY: 50%
SET TO: 60% ? SET TO: 60% ?
THIS WILL ERASE ALL LOGS!x
PRESS TO CONFIRM CHANGE
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected
record type: whether the data should be averaged over the interval, the
minimum or maximum measured during the interval, or the current value
(last value measured). Data treatment doesnt apply to all data, just to the
concentration measurement. All other data points log the current value at
the end of the interval.
Note This feature is found in all iSeries instruments, but it is

recommended that the data type be set to ONLY the current value (cur), as
the datalogging averaging is done in addition to the normal concentration
averaging.

> Configure Datalogging > Data Treatment.
SET LREC DATA TYPE:

CURRENTLY: AVG
SET TO: CUR ?
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control

Settings and configuration.

Operation
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Communication

Settings.
COMMUNICATION SETTINGS:
>SERIAL SETTINGS
INSTRUMENT ID
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
STREAMING DATA CONFIG
TCP/IP SETTINGS
Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and
configuration.
Settings > Serial Settings.
SERIAL SETTINGS:
>BAUD RATE 9600
DATA BITS 8
PARITY NONE
STOP BITS 1
RS-232/485 SEL RS-232
Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS-232/RS-485 interface baud rate.
Baud rates of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
are available. The analyzers default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide
backwards compatibility with the older C-series analyzers.
Settings > Serial Settings > Baud Rate.
BAUD RATE:
CURRENTLY: 9600
SET TO: 19200 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Data Bits The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7
or 8 (default).

Operation

Settings > Serial Settings > Data Bits.
DATA BITS:
CURRENTLY: 8
SET TO: 7 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Parity The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None
(default), Even, or Odd.
Settings > Serial Settings > Parity.
PARITY:
CURRENTLY: NONE
SET TO: ODD ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Stop Bits The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial
port to 1 (default) or 2.
Settings > Serial Settings > Stop Bits.
STOP BITS:
CURRENTLY: 1
SET TO: 2 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
RS-232/RS-485 Selection The RS-232/RS-485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the
RS-232 or RS-485 specification for serial communication.

Operation
Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS-
232 and RS-485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently
connected to the analyzer.

Settings > Serial Settings > RS-232/485 Selection.
RS-232/RS-485 SELECTION: RS-232/RS-485 SELECTION:

XXXXXX** WARNING **XXXXXXX CURRENTLY: RS-232
DISCONNECT THE SERIALX X SET TO: RS-485 ?
CABLES BEFORE CHANGING X MAKE SURE THAT THE CABLEXX
THE SELECTION!XXXXXX IS OFF: PRESS TO CONFIRM
TO CONTINUE TOGGLE VALUE
Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID
number. The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C-Link
or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data. It may be
necessary to edit the ID number if two or more instruments of the same
model are connected to one computer. Valid Instrument ID numbers are
from 0 to 127. The Model 42i has a default Instrument ID of 42. For
more information about the Instrument ID, see Appendix B C-Link
Protocol Commands or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol.
Settings > Instrument ID.
INSTRUMENT ID:
CURRENTLY: 42
SET TO: 50 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Communication Protocol The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for
serial communications. Possible choices include: C-Link, MODBUS,
Geysitech, and Streaming Data.
Settings > Communication Protocol.

Operation
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL:
CURRENTLY: CLINK
SET TO: STREAMING ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration
of the 8 streaming data output items, streaming interval, current data
format, and current timestamp setting. The Choose Stream Data submenu
displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from.
Choices are Concentrations, Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if
the I/O expansion board option is installed).
Note The selected item list is different depending on the

AUTO/MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings. Changing
either of these settings will produce a different set of streaming data items.
If either of these modes is going to be changed on a regular basis, then the
user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to
each setting.

Settings > Streaming Data Config.
STREAMING DATA CONFIG

>INTERVAL 10 SEC
ADD LABELS NO
PREPEND TIMESTAMP YES
ADD FLAGS YES
ITEM 1 NO
Streaming Data Interval The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new
record will be generated. The following interval times are available: 1, 2, 5,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240, and 300 seconds.
Settings > Streaming Data Config > Interval.

Operation
STREAMING DATA INTERVAL:

CURRENTLY: 10 SEC
SET TO: 20 SEC ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Note Add Labels, Prepend Timestamp, and Add Flags are toggle items that
change between yes or no when selected.
Choose Stream Data The Choose Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can
be sent via streaming data. Choices are Concentrations, Other
Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board is installed).
Settings > Streaming Data Config > Item 18.
CHOOSE STREAM DATA:

>CONCENTRATIONS
OTHER MEASUREMENTS
ANALOG INPUTS
Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the
concentrations to the selected streaming data item. The currently selected
item is shown by <-- after it. Once an item is selected, pressing
will save the selected streaming data item. In dual or auto range mode,
HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low range concentrations.
Rang (NOx) is visible only in auto range mode.
Settings > Streaming Data Config > select Item > Concentrations.
CONCENTRATIONS:
>NONE
NO <--
NO2
NOx
RANGE (NOX)

Operation
Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other
available measurement types to the selected streaming data item. The
currently selected item is shown by <-- after it. Once an item is selected,
pressing will save the selected streaming data item. BKG and COEF
items are displayed only if Ouput Conc Cal option is set to YES in the
Instrument Configuration screen.
Settings > Streaming Data Config > Select Item > Other
Measurements.
OTHER MEASUREMENTS:
>NONE
INT TEMP
CHAMBER TEMP
COOLER TEMP
NO2 CNV TEMP
CHAMBER PRES
FLOW
PMT VOLTS
NO BKG
NOx BKG
LO NO COEF
LO NO2 COEF
LO NOx COEF
HI NO COEF
HI NO2 COEF
HI NOx COEF
OZONATOR FLOW
EXT ALARMS
Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal
(none or analog inputs 18) to the selected streaming data item. The
currently selected item is shown by <-- after it. Once an item is selected,
pressing will save the selected streaming data item. The analog
inputs 18 will not show if the Ouput Conc Cal option is set to YES in the
Instrument Configuration screen.
Settings > Streaming Data Config > Select Item > Analog Inputs.

Operation
ANALOG INPUTS:
>NONE
ANALOG IN 1
ANALOG IN 2
ANALOG IN 3
ANALOG IN 4
TCP/IP Settings The TCP/IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are
required for Ethernet communications.
Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters
have been changed for the change to take effect.

Settings > TCP/IP Settings.
TCP/IP SETTINGS:
>USE DHCP OFF
IP ADDR 10.209.43.237
NETMASK 255.255.254.0
GATEWAY 10.209.42.1
HOST NAME iSeries
NTP SVR 10.209.43.237
Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or not. When DHCP is enabled, the
network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument.
Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Use DCHP.
DHCP:
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE
CYCLE POWER TO CHANGE DHCP

Operation
IP Address The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address. The IP address can
only be changed when DHCP is off. If DHCP is on, the instrument will
respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON. For more
information on DHCP, see Use DHCP above.
Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IP Address.
IP ADDRESS:
CURRENT: 10.209.43.237
SET TO: 10.209.43.237 1
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Netmask The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask. The netmask is used to
determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate
to other devices. The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is off. If
DHCP is on, the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF
DHCP IS ON. For more information on DHCP, see Use DHCP
above.
Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Netmask.
NETMASK:
CURRENT: 255.255.254.0
SET TO: 255.255.254.0 0
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Default Gateway The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address. The
default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off. If DHCP is on,
the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON.
For more information on DHCP, see Use DHCP above. Any traffic to
addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this
address.
Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Gateway.

Operation
DEFAULT GATEWAY:
CURRENT: 10.209.42.1
SET TO: 10.209.42.1 1
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name. When DHCP is
enabled, this name is reported to the DHCP server.
Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Host Name.
HOST NAME:
CURRENT: ISERIES
ISERIES SSSSS ?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE
Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server screen is used to edit the IP
Server address of the NTP server. An NTP server may be used to periodically
synchronize the instruments real-time clock with a standard. More
information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be
found at http://www.ntp.org.
Settings > TCP/IP Settings > NTP Svr.
NTP SERVER IP ADDRESS:

CURRENT: 10.209.43.237
SET TO: 10.209.43.237 1
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
I/O Configuration The I/O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzers
I/O system. The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I/O
expansion board option is installed.

Operation
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > I/O Configuration.
I/O CONFIGURATION:
>OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS
DIGITAL INPUT SETTINGS
ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIG
ANALOG INPUT CONFIG
Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output
relays available, and allows the user to select the logic state or instrument
parameter for the relay selected.
Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned
state occurs to show up on the outputs.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > I/O Configuration >
Output Relay Settings.
OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS:

>1 NOP GEN ALARM
2 NOP LOCAL/REMOTE
3 NOP UNITS
4 NOP CONC ALARM
5 NOP NONE
Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I/O relay to
either normally open or normally closed. The default state is open, which
indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground
is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action.
Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed.
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP:

>LOGIC STATE OPEN
INSTRUMENT STATE

Operation
Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument
state that is assigned to the selected relay output. A submenu lists signal
types of either alarm or non-alarm to choose from.
Output Relay Settings > Select Relay > Instrument State.
CHOOSE SIGNAL TYPE:

>ALARMS
NON-ALARM
Alarms The Alarms screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected
relay output. The currently selected item is shown by <-- after it. The
I/O board status alarm is only present if the I/O expansion board is
installed. Zero and Span Check Cal are only present if the automated
zero/span check is enabled. See the Alarms Menu section later in this
chapter for more information on alarm items.
Output Relay Settings > Select Relay > Instrument State > Alarms.

Operation
ALARM STATUS ITEMS:

>NONE
GEN ALARM <--
NO CONC MAX
NO CONC MIN
NO2 CONC MAX
NO2 CONC MIN

NOx CONC MAX
NOx CONC MIN
INT TEMP
CHAMB TEMP
COOLER TEMP
NO2 CV TEMP
PRESSURE
FLOW
OZONE FLOW
MB STATUS
MIB STATUS
I/O BD STATUS
CONC ALARM
ZERO CHK/CAL
SPAN CHK/CAL
EXT ALARM 1
EXT ALARM 2
EXT ALARM 3
Non-Alarm The Non-Alarm screen allows the user to select a non-alarm status for the
selected relay output. The currently selected item is shown by <-- after it.
The zero, span, and sample modes are only present if the zero/span valve
option is installed.
Output Relay Settings > select Relay > Instrument State > Non-Alarm.
NON ALARM STATUS ITEMS:

>NONE
AUTORANGE (NOx)
LOCAL/REMOTE
SERVICE
UNITS
ZERO MODE
SPAN MODE
NO MODE
NOX MODE
SAMPLE MODE
PURGE MODE

Operation
Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs
available, and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument
parameter for the relay selected.
Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the
action to be activated.
Not all of the I/O available in the instrument is brought out on the
supplied terminal board. If more I/O is desired, an alternative means of
connection is required. (See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits.)
Digital Input Settings.
DIGITAL INPUT SETTINGS:

>1 NOP NO MODE
2 NOP NOX MODE
3 NOP SET BACKGROUND
4 NOP CAL TO LO SPAN
5 NOP NONE
Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I/O relay to
either normally open or normally closed. The default state is open, which
indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is
normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action.
Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or
normally closed.
DIGITAL INPUT SETUP:

>LOGIC STATE OPEN
INSTRUMENT STATE

Operation
Instrument Action The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument
action that is assigned to the selected digital input. The zero and span
modes are only present if the zero/span valve option is installed.
Digital Input Settings > select Relay > Instrument Action.
CHOOSE ACTION:
>NONE
ZERO MODE
SPAN MODE
NO MODE <--
NOX MODE
SET BACKGROUND
CAL TO LO SPAN
AOUTS TO ZERO
AOUTS TO FS
CAL TO HI SPAN
EXT ALARM 1
EXT ALARM 2
EXT ALARM 3
Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog
(Select Channel) output channels available for configuration. Channel choices include all
voltage channels, all current channels, individual voltage channels 16, and
individual current channels 16 (if the I/O expansion board option is
installed).
Analog Output Config.
OUTPUT CHANNELS:
>ALLOW OVER/UNDER RANGE
ALL VOLTAGE CHANNELS
ALL CURRENT CHANNELS
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2
Allow Over/Under Range The Allow Over/Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the
analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100
mV, 1 V, 5 V, 10 V, or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V, 0

Operation
mA, or 4 mA. By default, this parameter is set to on and 5% over and

under range is allowed for all analog output channels.
Analog Output Config > Allow Over/Under Range.
ALLOW OVER/UNDER RANGE:

CURRENTLY: ON
SET TO: OFF ?
TOGGLE VALUE
Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog
(Select Action) output configuration choices, from which the user selects the parameter to
adjust for the selected output channel. Configuration choices include
selecting range, setting minimum/maximum values, and choosing the
signal to output.
Note The settings are different depending on the AUTO/MANUAL

MODE and RANGE MODE settings. Changing either of these settings
will produce a different set of analog output data items. If either of these
modes is going to be changed on a regular basis, then the user must
configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each
setting.
Analog Output Config > All Voltage Channels, All Current
Channels, Voltage Channel 16 or Current Channel 16.
ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIG:

>SELECT RANGE
SET MINIMUM VALUE
SET MAXIMUM VALUE
CHOOSE SIGNAL TO OUTPUT
Select Range The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected
analog output channel. Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are: 0-100
mV, 0-1, 0-5, and 0-10 V. Possible ranges for the current outputs are: 0-20
mA and 4-20 mA.

Operation
Analog Output Config > select Channel > Select Range.
SELECT OUTPUT RANGE:

SELECTED OUTPUT: V ALL
CURRENTLY: 0-10V
SET TO: 0-100mV ?
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Minimum and Maximum The Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero (0)
Value and full-scale (100) values, respectively, in percentages for the selected
analog output channel. See Table 37 for a list of choices. The minimum
and maximum output value screens function the same way. The following
example shows the set minimum value screen.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > IO Configuration >
Analog Output Config > select Channel > Set Minimum or Maximum
Value.
MINIMUM OUTPUT PERCENT:

SELECTED OUTPUT: V ALL
CURRENTLY: N/A %
SET TO: 0000.5 % ?
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Table 37. Analog Output Zero to Full-Scale Table

Output Zero % Value Full-Scale 100% Value
NO Zero (0) Range Setting
NO2 Zero (0) Range Setting
NOx Zero (0) Range Setting
LO NO Zero (0) Range Setting
LO NO2 Zero (0) Range Setting
LO NOx Zero (0) Range Setting
HI NO Zero (0) Range Setting
HI NO2 Zero (0) Range Setting
HI NOx Zero (0) Range Setting

Operation
Output Zero % Value Full-Scale 100% Value

Range (NOx) Recommend not to change the setting for this output
Internal Temp User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
Chamber Temp User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
Cooler Temp User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
NO2 Converter Temp User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
Perm Oven Gas Temp Perm Oven Gas alarm min value Perm Oven Gas alarm max value
Perm Oven Heater Temp Perm Oven Heater alarm min Perm Oven Heater alarm max
value value
Chamber Pressure User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
Flow User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
PMT Volts 700 volts 1100 volts
Ozonator Flow User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value
Everything Else 0 Units 10 Units
Choose Signal to Output The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the analog output
signal choices. Choices are grouped into three categories: Concentrations,
Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board
option is installed). This allows the user to select the output signal that will
be assigned to each analog channel. The Concentrations screen is shown
below. See Table 38 for a list of items for each signal group choice. The
analog inputs 18 will not show if the Ouput Conc Cal option is set to
YES in the Instrument Configuration screen.
Note The settings are different depending on the AUTO/MANUAL

MODE and RANGE MODE settings. Changing either of these settings
will produce a different set of analog output data items. If either of these
modes is going to be changed on a regular basis, then the user must
configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each
setting.
Analog Output Config > select Channel > Choose Signal to Output.

Operation
CHOOSE SIGNAL TYPE:

>CONCENTRATIONS
OTHER MEASUREMENTS
ANALOG INPUTS
CHOOSE SIGNAL - CONC

SELECTED OUTPUT: V1
CURRENTLY: NO
SET TO: NONE ?
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Table 38. Signal Type Group Choices

Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs
None None None
NO (single/auto range mode) Internal Temp Analog Input 1
NO2 (single/auto range mode) Chamber Temp Analog Input 2
NOx (single/auto range mode) Cooler Temp Analog Input 3
LO NO (dual mode) NO2 Converter Temp Analog Input 4
LO NO2 dual mode) Perm Oven Gas Analog Input 5
LO NOx (dual mode) Perm Oven Heater Analog Input 6
HI NO (dual mode) Chamber Pressure Analog Input 7
HI NO2 (dual mode) Flow Analog Input 8
HI NOx dual mode) PMT Volts
Range (NOx) (auto range mode) NO BKG
NOx BKG
LO NO COEF
LO NO2 COEF
LO NOx COEF
HI NO COEF
HI NO2 COEF
HI NOx COEF
Ozonator Flow
Ext Alarms

Operation
Analog Input The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input
Configuration channels available for configuration. This screen is only displayed if the I/O
expansion board option is installed. Configuration includes entering the
Descriptor, Units, Decimal Places, choice of 110 points in the table, and
corresponding number of points selected. This menu is not displayed if the
Output Conc Cal option is selected.
Analog Input Config.
ANALOG INPUT CONFIG:

>CHANNEL 1 IN1
CHANNEL 2 IN2
CHANNEL 3 IN3
CHANNEL 4 IN4
CHANNEL 5 IN5
ANALOG INPUT 01 CONFIG:

>DESCRIPTOR IN1
UNITS V
DECIMAL PLACES 2
TABLE POINTS 2
POINT 1
POINT 2
Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor, or name, for
the selected analog input channel. The descriptor is used in datalogging
and streaming data to report what data is being sent out. The descriptor
may be from 1 to 3 characters in length, and defaults to IN1 to IN8 (user
input channel number).
Analog Input Config > select Channel > Descriptor.
ANALOG INPUT DESCRIPTOR:

CURRENTLY: IN1
IN1
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE

Operation
Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog
input channel. The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in
datalogging and streaming data. The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in
length, and defaults to V (volts).
Analog Input Config > select Channel > Units.
ANALOG INPUT UNITS:

CURRENTLY: V
VN1
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE
Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are
displayed to the right of the decimal, from 0 to 6, with a default of 2.
Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Decimal Places.
DECIMAL PLACES:
CURRENTLY: 2
SET TO: 3 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many
points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected
channel. The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in
this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input
voltage. Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value
(010.5 V) and a corresponding reading value. Only two points are
necessary for linear inputs, however a larger number of points may be used
to approximate non-linear inputs. The points range from 2 to 10, with a
default of 2.
Analog Input Config > select Channel > Table Points.

Operation
NUMBER OF TABLE POINTS:

CURRENTLY: 2
SET TO: 10 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Table Point The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table
point.
Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Point 1-10.
TABLE POINT 01 CONFIG:

>VOLTS 0.00
USER VALUE 0.00
Volts The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected
table point in the conversion table, from 0.00 to 10.50. The default table is
a two-point table with point 1: 0.00 V = 000.0 U and point 2: 10.00 V =
10.0 U, where U is the previously entered unit of measure.
Analog Input Config > select Channel > select Point > Volts.
TABLE POINT 01 VOLTS:

CURRENTLY: 0.00
SET TO: 00.00
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE

Operation
User Value The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the
corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion
table, from -9999999 to 99999999. The default table is a two-point table
with point 1: 0.00 V = 000.0 U and point 2: 10.00 V = 10.0 U, where U is
the previously entered unit of measure.
Analog Input Config > select Channel > select Point > User Value.
TABLE POINT 01 USER VAL:

CURRENTLY: 0.00
SET TO: 00000.00
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Temperature The Temperature Compensation screen allows the user to turn temperature
Compensation compensation on or off. Temperature compensation changes to the
instrument's output signal that occur due to internal instrument
temperature variations. The effects of temperature changes on the analyzer's
subsystems and output have been empirically determined. This empirical
data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature. This
compensation can be used for special applications, or when operating the
instrument outside the recommended temperature range, even though the
Model 42i does not require temperature compensation for EPA
equivalency.
When temperature compensation is on, the display shows the current
internal instrument temperature (measured by a thermistor on the Interface
board). When temperature compensation is off, the display shows the
factory standard temperature of 30 C.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Temperature
Compensation.
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION:
COMP TEMP: 30.0 oC
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE

Operation
Pressure Pressure compensation provides compensation for any changes to the

Compensation instrument's output signal due to reaction chamber pressure variations. The
effects of reaction chamber pressure changes on the analyzer's subsystems
and output have been empirically determined. This empirical data is used
to compensate for any change in reaction chamber pressure. This
compensation can be used even though the Model 42i does not require
pressure compensation for EPA equivalency.
When pressure compensation is on, the first line of the display represents
the current pressure in the reaction chamber. When pressure compensation
is off, the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 200
mmHg.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Pressure
Compensation.
PRESSURE COMPENSATION:
COMP PRES: 200.0 mmHg
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE
Screen Contrast The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display.
Intensities between 0 and 100% in increments of 5 are available. Changing
the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at
extreme temperatures.
Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature.
Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another. If the
LCD is replaced, the contrast may need to be reset.
Note If the display contrast is not optimal, but the content on the screen is
visible, select Instrument Controls > Screen Contrast and adjust the screen
contrast. If the content on the screen is not visible, use the set contrast 10
C-Link command to set the screen contrast to mid-range, then optimize
the contrast. See contrast levels in Appendix B, C-Link Protocol
Commands for more information on this command.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Screen Contrast.

Operation
SCREEN CONTRAST:
CURRENTLY: 50 %
SET TO: 60 % ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Service Mode The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off.
Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access
to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or
diagnosing the Model 15i. The service (wrench) icon on the status bar is
shown when service mode is on. For more information about the service
mode, see Service Menu later in this chapter.
Note The service mode should be turned off when finished, as it prevents
remote operation.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Service Mode.
SERVICE MODE:
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE
Date/Time The Date/Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date
and time (24-hour format). The internal clock is powered by its own
battery when instrument power is off.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Date/Time.
DATE AND TIME: DATE AND TIME:

19 MAR 2005 12:34:56 19 MAR 2005 12:34:56 ?
PRESS TO EDIT SETTING: DAYS
SET MONTHS
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
Timezone The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. This should be set to the timezone that the
instrument is located in. If the exact timezone is not shown in the list, it
may be entered via the C-LINK tz command (see Appendix B). The
selections are: UTC (GMT), EST (GMT+5), CST (GMT+6), MST
(GMT+7), PST (GMT+8), YST (GMT+9), HST (GMT+10), NST
(GMT+11), DLW (GMT+12), CET (GMT-1), EET (GMT-2), BST
(GMT-3), DLT (GMT-4), ECH (GMT-5), FOX (GMT-6), GLF (GMT-
7), CCT (GMT-8), JST (GMT-9), GST (GMT-10), LMA (GMT-11),
DLE (GMT-12), EDT (GMT+5/4), CDT (GMT+6/5), MDT
(GMT+7/6), and PDT (GMT+8/7).
Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for
the first time, or if the timezone was cleared with a C-Link command.
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Timezone.
TIMEZONE FOR TIMESERVER:

CURRENTLY: UTC (GMT)
SET TO: EST (GMT+5) ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and
functions. This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument. The
analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the
I/O expansion board option is installed.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics.

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
DIAGNOSTICS:
>PROGRAM VERSION
VOLTAGES
TEMPERATURES
PRESSURE
FLOW
ANALOG INPUT READINGS

ANALOG INPUT VOLTAGES
DIGITAL INPUTS
RELAY STATES
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION
CONTACT INFORMATION
Program Version The Program Version screen (read only) shows the version number of the
program installed. Prior to contacting the factory with any questions
regarding the instrument, please note the product model name and
program version number.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Program Version.
PROGRAM VERSIONS:
PRODUCT: MODEL 42i
VERSION: 01.00.01.074
FIRMWARE: 09.06.19
Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings. This
screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating
voltages without having to use a voltage meter. The I/O board item is only
displayed if the I/O expansion board option is installed.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages.
VOLTAGES:
>MOTHERBOARD
INTERFACE BOARD
I/O BOARD

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage
readings on the motherboard.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > Motherboard
Voltages.
MOTHERBOARD VOLTAGES:
3.3 SUPPLY 3.3 V
5.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V
24.0 SUPPLY 24.1 V
-3.3 SUPPLY -3.3 V
Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage
readings on the interface board.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > Interface Board
Voltages.
INTERFACE BOARD VOLTAGES:

PMT SUPPLY 785.5 V
3.3 SUPPLY 3.3 V
5.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V
15.0 SUPPLY 15.0 V
P15.0 SUPPLY 15.0 V
24.0 SUPPLY 24.0 V

-15.0 SUPPLY -15.0 V
I/O Board Voltages The I/O Board screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage
readings on the I/O expansion board. This menu is only displayed if the
I/O expansion board option is installed.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > I/O Board
Voltages.

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
I/O BOARD VOLTAGES:

3.3 SUPPLY 3.3 V
5.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V
15.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V
24.0 SUPPLY 24.0 V
-3.3 SUPPLY -3.3 V
Temperatures The Temperatures screen (read only) displays the internal temperature,
reaction chamber temperature, cooler temperature, converter temperatures,
and perm oven temperatures (if the permeation oven option is installed).
The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor
located on the interface board.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Temperatures.
TEMPERATURES:
o
INTERNAL 28.6 C
o
CHAMBER 49.0 C
o
COOLER -10.0 C
o
NO2 CONVERTER 320.7 C
o
NO2 CONV SET 325.0 C

o
PERM OVEN GAS 45.0 C
o
PERM OVEN HEATER 45.0 C
Pressure The Pressure screen (read only) displays the reaction chamber pressure. The
pressure is measured by a pressure transducer at the reaction chamber.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Pressure.
PRESSURE: 232.5 mmHg
Flow The Flow screen (read only) displays the sample and ozonator flow rate.
The flows are measured by internal flow sensors. For more information, see
Figure 11.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Flow.

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
FLOW: 0.700 LPM
OZONATOR FLOW OK
Analog Input The Analog Input Readings screen (read only) displays the 8 user-scaled
Readings analog readings (if the I/O expansion board option is installed).
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Analog Input Readings.
ANALOG INPUT READINGS:

>CO 10.2 PPM
SO2 18.2 PPB
CO2 250 PPM
FL1 20.42 LPM
IO7 0.0 V
Analog Input The Analog Input Voltages screen (read only) displays the 8 raw analog
Voltages voltage readings (if the I/O expansion board option is installed).
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Analog Input Voltages.
ANALOG INPUT VOLTAGES:

>ANALOG IN 1 6.24 V
ANALOG IN 2 4.28 V
ANALOG IN 3 0.00 V
ANALOG IN 4 0.00 V
ANALOG IN 5 0.00 V
Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen (read only) displays the state of the 16 digital
inputs. Pull-ups are provided on all of the inputs, so if nothing is connected
they will read (1), if an input is brought to ground, it will read (0).
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Digital Inputs.

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
DIGITAL INPUTS:
>INPUT 1 1
INPUT 2 1
INPUT 3 1
INPUT 4 1
INPUT 5 1
Relay States The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and
allows toggling of the state to either on (1) or off (0). The relays are
restored to their original states upon exiting this screen.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Relay States.
Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the
selected digital output.
RELAY STATE:
>OUTPUT 1 0
OUTPUT 2 0
OUTPUT 3 0
OUTPUT 4 1
OUTPUT 5 1
Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output
channels to zero or full-scale. Channel choices include all analog outputs, 6
voltage channels, and 6 current channels (if the I/O expansion board
option is installed).
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Test Analog Outputs.
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS:

>ALL
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4
Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices: Set to full-scale, set
to zero, or reset to normal. Full-scale sets the analog outputs to the full-
scale voltage, zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts, and reset returns the
output to normal operation. The analog outputs are returned to normal

Operation
Diagnostics Menu
operation upon exiting this screen. The following example shows the screen
when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Test Analog Outputs > ALL,
Voltage Channel 16, or Current Channel 16.
SET ANALOG OUTPUTS:

SETTING: ALL
OUTPUT SET TO: NORMAL
SET TO FULL SCALE
SET TO ZERO
RESET TO NORMAL
Instrument Configuration The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the

hardware configuration of the instrument.
Note If the analyzer is in service mode, pressing will toggle the

selected item between yes and no. Zero/span valves needs to be set to ON
in order to do zero and span checks, and auto calibration needs to be set to
ON in order to do zero and span calibration resets.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Instrument Configuration.
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION:
>I/O EXPANSION BOARD YES
ZERO/SPAN VALVES YES
PERM OVEN YES
LAG VOLUME NO
PERM DRYER NO
CONVERTER MOLY
DILUTION NO
AUTO CALIBRATION NO
OUTPUT CONC CAL DATA NO
Contact Information The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information.
In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Contact Information.

Operation
Alarms Menu
CONTACT INFORMATION:
CALL CENTER: 508-520-0430
WEB: WWW.THERMO.COM
Alarms Menu The Alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the
analyzer. If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit,
the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH,
respectively. If the alarm is not a level alarm, the status will go from OK
to FAIL. The total number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate
how many alarms have occurred.
To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum
limits, move the cursor to the item and press .
Items displayed are determined by the options installed. The zero/span

check and auto calibration screens are visible only if the zero/span check or
auto calibration options are enabled. The perm oven temperature screen is
visible only if the perm oven option is installed. The External Alarms menu
is displayed only if assigned as a digital input. The motherboard status,
interface board status, and I/O Expansion board status (if installed)
indicate that the power supplies are working and connections are
successful. There are no setting screens for these alarms.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms.
ALARMS:
ALARMS DETECTED 0
>INTERNAL TEMP OK
CHAMBER TEMP OK
COOLER TEMP OK
CONVERTER TEMP OK
PERM GAS TEMP OK

PRESSURE OK
FLOW OK
OZONATOR FLOW OK
ZERO CHECK OK
SPAN CHECK OK
ZERO AUTOCAL OK
SPAN AUTOCAL OK
NO CONCENTRATION OK
NO2 CONCENTRATION OK
NOx CONCENTRATION OK
EXTERANL ALARMS OK
MOTHERBOARD STATUS OK
INTERFACE STATUS OK
I/O EXP STATUS OK

Operation
Alarms Menu
Internal The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature
Temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits
range from 8 to 47 C. If the internal temperature reading goes beyond
either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated and the alarm
(bell) icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main
Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Internal Temp.
INTERNAL TEMPERATURE:
o
ACTUAL 28.6 C
o
>MIN 15.0 C
o
MAX 45.0 C
Min and Max Internal The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change
Temperature Limits the minimum internal temperature alarm limit. The minimum and
maximum internal temperature screens function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Internal Temp > Min or Max.
INTERNAL TEMPERATURE:
o
ACTUAL MIN: 15.0 C
o
SET MIN TO: 16.0 C ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Chamber The Chamber Temperature screen displays the current chamber

Temperature temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable
alarm limits range from 48 to 52 C. If the chamber temperature reading
goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated
and the alarm (bell) icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in
the Main Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Chamber Temp.

Operation
Alarms Menu
CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:
o
ACTUAL 49.0 C
o
>MIN 48.0 C
o
MAX 52.0 C
Min and Max Chamber The Minimum Chamber Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change
Temperature Limits the minimum chamber temperature alarm limit. The minimum and
maximum chamber temperature screens function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Chamber Temp > Min or Max.
CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:
o
ACTUAL MIN: 48.0 C
o
SET MIN TO: 49.0 C ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Cooler Temperature The Cooler Temperature screen displays the current cooler temperature
and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits
range from -40 to 10 C. If the cooler temperature reading goes beyond
either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated and the alarm
(bell) icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main
Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Cooler Temp.
COOLER TEMPERATURE:
o
ACTUAL -9.8 C
o
>MIN -20.0 C
o
MAX -1.0 C
Min and Max Cooler The Minimum Cooler Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change
Temperature Limits the minimum cooler temperature alarm limit. The minimum and
maximum cooler temperature screens function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Cooler Temp > Min or Max.

Operation
Alarms Menu
COOLER TEMPERATURE:
o
ACTUAL MIN -20.0 C
o
SET MIN TO: -10.0 C ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Converter The Converter Temperature screen displays the current converter

Temperature temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable
alarm limits range from 300 to 700 C. The actual alarm setpoints should
be set for the installed converter. If the converter temperature reading goes
beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated and
the alarm (bell) icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the
Main Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Converter Temp.
CONVERTER TEMPERATURE:
ACTUAL 320.7 oC
>MIN 300.0 oC
MAX 350.0 oC
Min and Max Converter The Minimum Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change
Temperature Limits the minimum converter temperature alarm limit. The minimum and
maximum converter temperature screens function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Converter Temp > Min or Max.
CONVERTER TEMPERATURE:
ACTUAL MIN 300.0 oC
SET MIN TO: 310.0 oC ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Permeation Oven The Permeation Oven Gas Temperature screen displays the current
Gas Temperature permeation oven gas temperature and sets the minimum and maximum
alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 25.00 to 50.00 C. If the

Operation
Alarms Menu
temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit,

an alarm is activated and the alarm (bell) icon appears in the status bar on
the Run screen and in the Main Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Perm Gas Temp.
POVEN GAS TEMPERATURE:

o
ACTUAL 45.00 C
o
>MIN 44.90 C
o
MAX 45.10 C
Min and Max Permeation Oven The Minimum Permeation Oven Gas Temperature alarm limit screen is
Temperature Limits used to change the minimum temperature alarm limit. The minimum and
maximum permeation gas temperature screens function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Perm Gas Temp > Min or Max.
POVEN GAS TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL MIN 300.0 oC
SET MIN TO: 310.0 oC ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Pressure The Pressure screen displays the current reaction chamber pressure reading
and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits
range from 150 to 300 mmHg. If the pressure reading goes beyond either
the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated and the alarm (bell)
icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Pressure.
PRESSURE:
ACTUAL 232.5 mmHg
>MIN 150.0 mmHg
MAX 300.0 mmHg

Operation
Alarms Menu
Min and Max Pressure The Minimum Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum
Limits temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum pressure screens
function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Pressure > Min or Max.
PRESSURE:
ACTUAL MIN: 200.0 mmHg
SET MIN TO: 210.0 mmHg?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE
Flow The Flow screen displays the current sample flow reading and sets the
minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from
0 to 1 LPM. If the sample flow reading goes beyond either the minimum
or maximum limit, an alarm is activated and the alarm (bell) icon appears
in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Flow.
FLOW:
ACTUAL 0.531 LPM
>MIN 0.750 LPM
MAX 1.000 LPM
Min and Max Flow Limits The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum
sample flow alarm limit. The minimum and maximum flow screens
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Flow > Min or Max.
FLOW:
ACTUAL MIN: 0.750 LPM
SET MIN TO: 0.760 LPM ?
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE

Operation
Alarms Menu
Ozonator Flow The Ozonator Flow screen (read only) is used to display the ozonator flow
readings. If the ozonator flow reading is 0.050 LPM (50 cc) or below, an
alarm is activated, and an alarm condition screen appears as LOW. If the
ozonator flow is above 0.050, the no alarm condition screen is displayed,
indicating that the flow is acceptable. Inadequate ozonator flow will cause
the ozonator to overheat, resulting in permanent damage to the ozonator.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Ozonator Flow.
OZONATOR FLOW:
ACTUAL > 0.050 LPM
Zero and Span The Zero and Span Check screens allow the user to view the status of the
Check most recent zero/span checks and set the maximum check offsets. An alarm
will be triggered if a zero or span check indicates drift that exceeds the
offset value. The zero and span check screens are visible only if the
zero/span check option is enabled and function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Zero or Span Check.
ZERO CHECK:
ALARM: OK
RESPONSE: 0.000
>MAX OFFSET: 10.000
Max Zero and Span The Max Zero and Span Check Offset screens are used to change the
Check Offset maximum check offsets. The maximum zero and span offset screens
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Zero or Span Check > Max
Offset.

Operation
Alarms Menu
MAX ZERO CHECK OFFSET:

CURRENTLY: 10.000
SET TO: 00011.00 ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Zero and Span Auto The Zero and Span Auto Calibration screens (read only) allow the user to
Calibration view the status of the most recent auto background calibration or span
calibrations. The zero and span auto calibration screens are visible only if
the auto calibration option is enabled and the zero or span cal reset
function is enabled.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Zero or Span Autocal.
ZERO AUTO CALIBRATION:

ALARM: OK
RESPONSE: 5.00
NO, NO2, and NOx The NO Concentration screen displays the current NO concentration and
Concentration sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits
range from 0 to 100,000 ppb (0 to 100 ppm) and 0 to 150,000 g/m3 (0 to
150 mg/m3). The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger
(alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value)
or a ceiling trigger (alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above
the minimum value). If the NO concentration goes beyond either the
minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated and the alarm (bell)
icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu.
The NO2 and NOx concentration screens function the same way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > NO, NO2, or NOx
Concentration.
NO CONCENTRATION:
ACTUAL 62.7
>MIN 0.0
MAX 100000.0
MIN TRIGGER CEILING

Operation
Alarms Menu
Min and Max NO, NO2, and The Minimum NO Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the
NOx Concentration Limits minimum NO concentration alarm limits. The minimum and maximum
NO, NO2, and NOx concentration alarm limit screens function the same
way.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Select Concentration > Min or
Max.
NO CONCENTRATION:
ACTUAL MIN: 0.0
SET MIN TO: 00020.00 ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Min Trigger The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to keep set the minimum
NO, NO2, and NOx concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or
ceiling. The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger (alarm
is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value) or a
ceiling trigger (alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the
minimum value).
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Select Concentration > Min
Trigger.
MIN TRIG(CEILING/FLOOR):
ACTUAL TRIGGER: CEILING
SET TRIGGER TO: FLOOR ?
TOGGLE AND SAVE VALUE
External Alarms The External Alarms menu is used to display the external alarm status for
alarm 1, 2, and 3 only if the external alarm is assigne as a digital input.
External alarms can be assigned to digital inputs using the Instruments
Controls > I/O Configuration > Digital Input Settings menu. External
alarms can also be logged, streamed, or output as a digital output by
choosing EXT ALARMS from the Other Measurements list.
In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > External Alarms.

Operation
Service Menu
ALARMS:
EXTERNAL ALARM 1 OK
EXTERNAL ALARM 2 OK
EXTERNAL ALARM 3 OK
Service Menu The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode.
When the service mode is active, the service (wrench) icon is displayed on
the right side of the status bar. To put the instrument into the service
mode:
In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Service Mode.
Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode.
Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the
service mode.
In the Main Menu, choose Service.
SERVICE:
>PMT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
RANGE MODE SELECT
CONVERTER SET TEMP
PRESSURE CALIBRATION
FLOW CALIBRATION
INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION

TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
ANALOG OUT CAL
ANALOG INPUT CAL
PERM OVEN SETTINGS
OZONATOR SAFETY
EXTENDED RANGES
DILUTION RATIO
DISPLAY PIXEL TEST
RESTORE USER DEFAULTS
PMT Voltage Adjustment The PMT Voltage Adjustment screen is used to manually adjust the PMT
supply voltage. The PMT voltage adjustment screen is visible only when
the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service
mode, see Service Mode earlier in this chapter.
Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service

technician.

Operation
Service Menu
In the Main Menu, choose Service > PMT Voltage Adjustment.
SET PMT VOLTAGE:

SET PMT: -750.0 V
COUNTS: 2254 ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Range Mode Select The Range Mode Select screen is used to switch between the various range
modes: Single, Dual, and Auto Range. The range mode select screen is
visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information
on the service mode, see Service Mode earlier in this chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Range Mode Select.
RANGE MODE SELECT:

CURRENTLY: SINGLE
SET TO: DUAL ?
CHANGE VALUE
SAVE VALUE
Converter Set Temperature The Converter Set Temperature screen is used to change the converter set
temperature. The converter set temperature reading is updated every
second. The converter set temperature screen is visible only when the
instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode,
see Service Mode earlier in the chapter.

technician.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Converter Set Temperature.
SET CONVERTER TEMP:

o
CURRENTLY: 325 C
o
SET TO: 325 C
INC/DEC
SAVE VALUE

Operation
Service Menu
Pressure Calibration The Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor
to zero, span, or restore factory default values. The pressure calibration is
on the service mode, see Service Mode earlier in this chapter.
The pressure sensors zero counts and span slope are displayed on the
menu.

technician.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration.
PRESSURE SENSOR CAL:

>ZERO 72
SPAN 1.1416
SET DEFAULTS
Calibrate Pressure Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen calibrates the pressure sensor at zero
pressure.
Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before

performing the zero calibration.
Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the
value.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration > Zero.
CALIBRATE PRESSURE ZERO:

CURRENTLY: 232.5 mmHg
SET TO: 0.0 mmHg
CONNECT VACUUM PUMP AND

SAVE ZERO PRESSURE

Operation
Service Menu
Calibrate Pressure Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the
pressure sensor calibration span point.
Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be disconnected so

the sensor is reading ambient pressure before performing the span
calibration. The operator should use an independent barometer to measure
the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before
calibrating.
value.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration > Span.
CALIBRATE PRESSURE SPAN:

CURRENTLY: 232.0 mmHg
SET TO: 760.0 mmHg ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Restore Default Pressure The Restore Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the
Calibration pressure calibration configuration values to factory defaults.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration > Set
Defaults.
RESTORE RESTORE
Flow Calibration The Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the flow sensor to zero,
span, or restore factory default values. The flow calibration screen is visible

Operation
Service Menu
only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the
service mode, see Service Mode earlier in the chapter.

technician.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration.
FLOW SENSOR CAL:

>ZERO 200
SPAN 1.0000
SET DEFAULTS
Calibrate Flow Zero The Calibrate Flow Zero screen calibrates the flow sensor at zero flow.
Note The pump must be disconnected before performing the zero

calibration.
value.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration > Zero.
CALIBRATE FLOW ZERO:

CURRENTLY: 0.004 LPM
SET TO: 0.000 LPM ?
DISCONNECT PUMP AND

SAVE CURRENT FLOW
Calibrate Flow Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow
sensor calibration span point.
Note An independent flow sensor is required to read the flow, then the
operator enters the flow value on this screen to perform the calibration.

Operation
Service Menu
value.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration > Span.
CALIBRATE FLOW SPAN:

CURRENTLY: 1.000 LPM
SET TO: 0.800 LPM ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Restore Default Flow The Restore Default Flow Calibration screen allows the user to reset the
Calibration flow calibration configuration values to factory defaults.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration > Set Defaults.
RESTORE RESTORE
Input Board Calibration The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the
input board A/D stages. The input board calibration menu is visible only
when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the

technician.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration.

Operation
Service Menu
INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION:

>MANUAL INPUT CAL
AUTOMATIC INPUT CAL
INPUT FREQUENCY DISP
Manual Input Calibration The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of
the input board A/D stages per the following procedure:
Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this
screen.
1. In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration >
Manual Input Cal.
2. Press to leave warning screen.
3. Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1.
4. Use and to change the gain from 1 to 100.
5. Use and to increment or decrement the D/A counts so

the frequency at gain 100 matches or is slightly above the frequency at
gain 1 (within 50 counts).
6. Press to save new input board calibration.
INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION: GAIN 1 - MANUAL:

TO CALIBRATE FREQ = 4500
xxxxxxx** WARNING **xxxxxx D/A = N/A ?
xTHIS ACTION MAY REQUIRExx
xxRECALIBRATION OF THEXXXX CHG GAIN INC/DEC
ENTIRE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM! SAVE VALUES
Automatic Input Calibration The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to do an automatic
calibration of the input board A/D stages. A message will be displayed after
the optimum setting has been determined.

Operation
Service Menu
Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this
screen.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration >
Automatic Input Cal.
Press to leave warning screen and begin automatic calibration.
INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION: INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION:

TO CALIBRATE ** IN PROGRESS **
XXXXXX** WARNING **XXXXXXX D/A = 2047
xTHIS ACTION MAY REQUIRExx TARGET = 0
xxRECALIBRATION OF THEXXXX FREQ = 0 0
ENTIRE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM! ZERO = 0 CNT = 1
Input Frequency Display The Input Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input
board gain. This may be used as a troubleshooting tool to ensure that the
input board is working properly. The gain setting and test mode are reset
upon exiting this screen. (That is, no changes are saved.)
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration > Input
Frequency Disp.
Press to leave warning screen.
Use and to toggle the test signal (between ON and OFF).
Use and to change the gain between 1, 10 and 100.
INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION: INPUT GAIN TEST:

TO CALIBRATE GAIN = 1
XXXXXX** WARNING **XXXXXXX TEST = OFF
CONCENTRATION CALCULATIONx FREQ = 5000
xx IS HALTED INSIDEXX XX CHG GAIN TEST MODE
THIS SCREEN! XX
Temperature Calibration The Temperature Calibration screen allows the user to view and set the
ambient temperature sensor offset, which basically adjusts the temperature
sensor so that it reads correctly. The temperature calibration is visible only
when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the

Operation
Service Menu

technician.
value.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Temperature Calibration.
CALIBRATE AMBIENT TEMP:

CURRENTLY: 32.3 C
SET TO: 032.5 oC ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Analog Output Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage
channels and 6 current channels for calibration. Current channels are
visible only if the I/O expansion board is installed. The analog output
calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode.
For more information on the service mode, see Service Mode earlier in
the chapter.

technician.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Out Cal.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL:

>VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4
VOLTAGE CHANNEL 5

Operation
Service Menu
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL:

>CALIBRATE ZERO
CALIBRATE FULL SCALE
Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the
Zero zero state of the selected analog output. The operator must connect a volt
meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0.0 V on the meter
for a voltage channel, or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel (depending
on the selected range). See the set output to: field on the display.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Out Cal > select Channel
> Calibrate Zero.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL: ZERO

CONNECT METER TO OUTPUT!
SELECTED OUTPUT: V1
SET TO: 100
SAVE VALUE INC/DEC
SET OUTPUT TO: 0.0 V
Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full-Scale screen allows the user to calibrate
Full-Scale the full-scale state of the selected analog output. The operator must connect
a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until the meter reads the
value shown in the set output to: field, in either V or mA, depending on
the selected output channel.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Out Cal > select Channel
> Calibrate Full Scale.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL: SPAN

CONNECT METER TO OUTPUT!
SELECTED OUTPUT: V1
SET TO: 3397
SAVE VALUE INC/DEC
SET OUTPUT TO: 10 V
Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog input
channels at both zero and full-scale. The Analog Input Calibration menu is

Operation
Service Menu
visible only when the I/O expansion board is installed. The analog input
calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode.
For more information on the service mode, see Service Mode earlier in
the chapter.

technician.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Input Cal.
ANALOG INPUT CAL:

>INPUT CHANNEL 1
INPUT CHANNEL 2
INPUT CHANNEL 3
INPUT CHANNEL 4
INPUT CHANNEL 5
ANALOG INPUT CAL:

>CALIBRATE ZERO
CALIBRATE FULL SCALE
Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the
Zero zero state of the selected analog input.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Input Cal > select Channel
> Calibrate Zero.
ANALOG INPUT CAL: ZERO
DISCONNECT SELECTED INPUT!
SELECTED INPUT: INPUT 1
CURRENTLY: 0.04 V
CALIBRATE INPUT TO ZERO
Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Full-Scale screen allows the user to calibrate
Full-Scale the full-scale state of the selected analog input.

Operation
Service Menu
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Input Cal > select Channel
> Calibrate Full Scale. (Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the
analog input channel.)
ANALOG INPUT CAL: SPAN

PROVIDE VOLTAGE TO INPUT!
SELECTED INPUT: INPUT 1
CURRENTLY: 9.84 V
SET TO: 10.00 V
CALIBRATE TO VALUE
Permeation Oven Settings The Permeation Oven Settings menu is used for setting up and calibrating
the permeation oven option. The permeation oven settings are visible only
if the permeation oven option installed and when the calibrator is in service
mode. For more information on the service mode, see Service Mode
earlier in this chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings.

technician.
PERM OVEN SETTINGS:

>CAL GAS THERMISTOR
CAL OVEN THERMISTOR
PERM OVEN SELECTION
FACTORY CAL GAS THERM
FACTORY CAL OVEN THERM
Calibrate Gas Thermistor The Calibrate Gas Thermistor menu is used for calibrating the permeation
oven gas thermistor using a water bath or known resistance.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Cal Gas
Thermistor.

Operation
Service Menu
CALIBRATE GAS THERMISTOR:

>WATER BATH
KNOWN RESISTOR
Water Bath The Calibrate Gas Thermistor Water Bath screen is used to view and set
the permeation oven gas temperature to a known temperature value.
Thermistor > Water Bath.
CAL GAS THERM (BATH):

o
CURRENTLY: 45.80 C
o
SET TO: 45.00 C
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Resistor The Calibrate Gas Thermistor Resistor screen is used to view and set the
permeation oven gas thermistor resistance to a known resistor value.
Thermistor > Known Resistor.
CAL GAS THERM (RESISTOR):

CURRENTLY: 3850 Ohms
SET TO: 04000 Ohms
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Calibrate Oven Thermistor The Calibrate Oven Thermistor screen is used to view and set the
permeation oven thermistor resistance to a known resistor value.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Cal Oven
Thermistor.

Operation
Service Menu
CAL OVEN THERM (RESISTOR):

SET TO: 04000 Ohms
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Permeation Oven Selection The Permeation Oven Setpoint screen is used to select the permeation oven
state to not present, or the desired temperature choice of 30, 35, and 45 C.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Perm Oven
Selection.
PERM OVEN SETPOINT:

CURRENTLY: NOT PRESENT
o
SET TO: 45 C ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Factory Calibrate Gas Thermistor The Factory Calibrate Gas Thermistor menu is used for calibrating the
permeation oven gas thermistor to either low point, high point, or set
defaults.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Factory
Cal Gas Therm.
FACTORY CAL GAS THERM:

>LOW POINT
HIGH POINT
SET DEFAULTS
Low and High Points The Calibrate Gas Thermistor Low Point screen is used to view and set the
permeation oven thermistor resistance. The low and high point screens
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Factory Cal
Gas Therm > Low or High Point.

Operation
Service Menu
CAL GAS THERM LOW POINT:

CURRENTLY: 0= 3850 Ohms
SET TO: 04000 Ohms
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Set Defaults The Set Defaults screen is used to reset the configuration values to factory
defaults.
Gas Therm > Set Defaults.

FOR PERM OVEN HTR THERM FOR PERM OVEN GAS THERM
RESTORE RESTORE
Factory Calibrate Oven The Factory Calibrate Oven Thermistor menu is used for calibrating the
Thermistor permeation oven heater thermistor to either low point, high point, or set
defaults.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Factory
Cal Oven Therm.
FACTORY CAL OVEN THERM:

>LOW POINT
HIGH POINT
SET DEFAULTS
Low and High Points The Calibrate Oven Thermistor Low Point screen is used to view and set
the permeation oven thermistor resistance. The low and high point screens
Oven Therm > Low or High Point.

Operation
Service Menu
CAL OVEN THERM LOW POINT:

CURRENTLY: 0= 3850 Ohms
SET TO: 04000 Ohms
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Set Defaults The Set Defaults screen is used to reset the configuration values to factory
defaults.
Oven Therm > Set Defaults.

FOR PERM OVEN HTR THERM FOR PERM OVEN HTR THERM
RESTORE RESTORE
Ozonator Safety The Ozonator Safety screen is used to turn the ozonator safety feature on
or off. If the ozonator safety is turned off, the ozonator will always be on,
even if the converter is not up to temperature. The ozonator shuts of if
there is a converter temperature alarm or an ozone flow alarm. If the safety
override is on, the instrument generates an ozone flow alarm.
The ozonator safety screen is visible only when the instrument is in service
mode. For more information on the service mode, see Service Mode
earlier in the chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Ozonator Safety.
OZONATOR SAFETY:
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE

Operation
Service Menu
Extended Ranges The Extended Ranges screen is used to turn the extended ranges feature on
and off. The extended ranges screen is visible only when the instrument is
in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see Service
Mode earlier in the chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Extended Ranges.
Press to toggle and set the extended ranges on or off.
EXTENDED RANGES:
CURRENTLY: OFF
SET TO: ON ?
TOGGLE VALUE
Dilution Ratio The Dilution Ratio screen allows the user to view and set the dilution ratio.
Acceptable values are 1500: 1. The default is 1:1. When this value is set,
the dilution ratio is applied to all concentration measurements. This screen
is only accessible if the dilution ratio option is installed.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Dilution Ratio.
DILUTION RATIO:
CURRENTLY: 001.0 :1
SET TO: 002.0 :1 ?
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test is used to test the LCD display. The display pixel
test is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more
information on the service mode, see Service Mode earlier in the chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Display Pixel Test.

Operation
Password Menu
DISPLAY PIXEL TEST:

DURING TEST PRESS OR xx
TO EXIT, TO TOGGLEXXXXXx
BEGIN TEST
GO BACK TO MENU
Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and
configuration values to factory defaults. The restore user defaults screen is
on the service mode, see Service Mode earlier in the chapter.
In the Main Menu, choose Service > Restore User Defaults.
RESTORE RESTORE
Password Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection. If
the instrument is locked, none of the settings may be changed via the
front panel user interface, but they can still be changed via remote
operation. When the front panel is locked, the user can still navigate the
menu and view data, instrument parameters, and settings, but nothing can
be changed. The password (lock) icon on the right side of the status bar
indicates that the password lock is active. The items visible under the
Password menu are determined by the instruments password status.
In the Main Menu, choose Password.
PASSWORD MENU:
>SET PASSWORD
LOCK INSTRUMENT
CHANGE PASSWORD
REMOVE PASSWORD
UNLOCK INSTRUMENT

Operation
Password Menu
Set Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock
the front panel, and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the
password is not set.
In the Main Menu, choose Password > Set Password
ENTER NEW PASSWORD:

RANGXXXXXE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE
Lock Instrument The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instruments front panel so
users cannot change any settings from the front panel. The lock instrument
screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set.
In the Main Menu, choose Password > Lock Instrument
LOCK FRONT PANEL:

XXXPRESSING ENTER WILLXXXX
PREVENT USER FROM CHANGING
XCONFIG FROM FRONT PANELXX
LOCK AND RETURN TO RUN
Lock/Unlock and If the instrument is locked via the front panel using Password > Lock
Local/Remote Operation Instrument, the instrument reports being in Remote mode. In this mode,
the front panel is locked, where data can be viewed, settings can be
viewed but not changed using the front panel interface, and the remote
Set commands are active.
If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password
> Unlock Instrument, the instrument reports being in Local mode, the
front panel interface is unlocked, and settings can be changed from the
front panel.
Refer to C-Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information
about mode, allow mode, and power up mode commands.

Operation
Password Menu
Change Password The Change Password screen is used to change the password used to
unlock the instruments front panel. The change password screen is shown
if the instrument is unlocked.
In the Main Menu, choose Password > Change Password
ENTER NEW PASSWORD:

RANGXXXXXE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE
Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and
disable password protection. The remove password screen is shown if the
instrument is unlocked and the password is set.
In the Main Menu, choose Password > Remove Password
REMOVE PASSWORD:
XXXPRESSING ENTER WILLXXXX
XREMOVE CURRENT PASSWORDXX
XXXAND DISABLE LOCKINGXXXX
REMOVE PASSWORD
Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the
front panel. The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is
locked.
In the Main Menu, choose Password > Unlock Instrument
ENTER THE PASSWORD:

RANGXXXXXE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP
OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE
0123456789 ./- SAVE

Chapter 4
Calibration
This chapter describes procedures for performing a multipoint calibration
of the Model 42i. The information described here is considered adequate to
perform the calibration. However, if greater detail is desired, the user is
referred to the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 50, Appendix F.
The calibration technique is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between
NO and O3 which produces stoichiometric quantities of NO2 in
accordance with the reaction:
NO + O 3 NO2 + O2
The quantitative nature of this reaction is such that when the NO

concentration is known, the concentration of NO2 can be determined.
Ozone is added to excess NO in a dynamic calibration system, and the NO
channel of the chemiluminescence NO-NO2-NOx analyzer is used as an
indicator of changes in NO concentration.
When O3 is added, the decrease in NO concentration observed on the
calibrated NO channel is equivalent to the concentration of NO2
produced. Adding variable amounts of O3 from a stable O3 generator can
change the amount of NO2 generated. The following sections discuss the
required apparatus and procedures for calibrating the instrument:
Equipment Required on page 4-1
Pre-Calibration on page 4-8
Calibration on page 4-9
Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode on page 4-16
Zero and Span Check on page 4-20
Equipment Required The following equipment is required to calibrate the analyzer:

Zero gas generator
Gas phase titrator

Calibration
Equipment Required
Zero Gas Generator A zero air source, such as a Thermo Scientific Model 111 Zero Air Supply or
Model 1160 Zero Air Supply, free of contaminants such as NO, NO2, and
O3 is required for dilution, calibration, and gas phase titration.
Compression The zero air source should be at an elevated pressure to allow accurate and
reproducible flow control and to aid in subsequent operations such as
drying, oxidation, and scrubbing. An air compressor that gives an output of
10 psig is usually sufficient for most applications.
Drying Several drying methods are available. Passing the compressed air through a
bed of silica gel, using a heatless air dryer, or removing water vapor with a
permeation dryer are three possible approaches.
Oxidation NO is usually oxidized to NO2 in order to ease its scrubbing. Oxidation

can be accomplished by either ozonation or chemical contact. During
ozonation, the air is passed through an ozone generator. The O3 that is
produced reacts with the NO to form NO2. Care must be taken to allow
sufficient residence time for the ozonation reaction to go to completion.
Chemical oxidation is accomplished by passing the air stream through a
reacting bed. Such agents as CrO3 on an alumina support or Purafil are
very efficient at oxidizing NO to NO2. The chemical contact approach has
the advantage of needing no electrical power input for its application.
Scrubbing Fixed bed reactors are commonly used in the last step of zero air generation
to remove the remaining contaminants by either further reaction or
absorption. Table 41 lists materials that can be effective in removing
contaminants.
Table 41. Scrubbing Materials
To Remove Use
NO2 Soda-Lime (6-12 mesh), Purafil
Hydrocarbons Molecular Sieve (4A), Activated Charcoal
O3 and SO2 Activated Charcoal

Calibration
Equipment Required
Gas Phase Titrator A gas phase titrator (GPT), such as is included in the Thermo Scientific
Model 146 Series Multigas Calibration System is used to generate NO2
concentrations from NO concentrations. Figure 41 shows the suggested
placement of the component parts of a gas phase titration apparatus.
Equipment Damage All connections between components in the system

should be made with glass, Teflon, or other non-reactive material.
Flow Controllers The airflow controllers should be devices capable of maintaining constant
airflows within 2% of the required flow rate. The NO flow controller
should be capable of maintaining constant NO flows within 2% of the
required flow rate.
Pressure Regulator The pressure regulator for the standard NO cylinder must have a non-
reactive diaphragm and internal parts, and a suitable delivery pressure.
Figure 41. GPT System

Calibration
Equipment Required
Ozone Generator The ozone generator must be capable of generating sufficient and stable
levels of ozone for reaction with NO to generate NO2 concentrations in the
range required.
Note Ozone generators of the electric discharge type may produce NO and
NO2 and are not recommended.
Diverter Valve A valve can be used to divert the NO flow when zero air is required at the
manifold.
Reaction Chamber The reaction chamber used for the reaction of ozone with excess NO
should have sufficient volume so that the residence time meets the
requirements specified in this chapter.
Mixing Chamber The mixing chamber is used to provide thorough mixing of the reaction
products and diluent air.
Output Manifold The output manifold should be of sufficient diameter to insure an

insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection. The system must
have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to
prevent ambient air from entering the manifold.
Reagents The following information describes the NO concentration standard and

the method for calculating the NO concentration standard and the NO2
impurity.
NO Concentration Standard A cylinder containing 10 to 50 ppm NO in N2 with less than 1 ppm NO2
is usually used as the concentration standard. The cylinder must be
traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) NO
in N2 Standard Reference Material or NO2 Standard Reference Material.
Procedures for certifying the NO cylinder (working standard) against an
NIST traceable NO or NO2 standard and for determining the amount of
NO2 impurity are given in EPA Publication No. EPA-600/4-75-003,
Technical Assistance Document for the Chemiluminescence Measurement
of Nitrogen Dioxide.

Calibration
Equipment Required
In addition, the procedure for the certification of a NO working standard

against an NIST traceable NO standard and determination of the amount
of NO2 impurity in the working standard is reproduced here. The cylinder
should be re-certified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality
control program.
Use the NIST traceable NO standard and the GPT calibration procedure
to calibrate the NO, NOx, and NO2 responses of the instrument. Also
determine the converter efficiency of the analyzer. Refer to the calibration
procedure in this manual and in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40,
Part 50, Appendix F for exact details. Ignore the recommended zero offset
adjustments.
Assaying a Working NO Standard Use the following procedure to calculate the NO concentration standard
Against a NIST-traceable NO and NO2 impurity.
Standard
1. Generate several NO concentrations by dilution of the NO working
standard.
2. Use the nominal NO concentration, [NO]NOM, to calculate the diluted

concentrations.
3. Plot the analyzer NO response (in ppm) versus the nominal diluted
NO concentration and determine the slope, SNOM.
4. Calculate the [NO] concentration of the working standard, [NO]STD,

from:
[NO ]STD = [NO ]NOM x S NOM
5. If the nominal NO concentration of the working standard is unknown,

generate several NO concentrations to give on-scale NO responses.
6. Measure and record FNO and FT for each NO concentration generated.
7. Plot the analyzer NO response versus FNO/FT and determine the slope
which gives [NO]STD directly. The analyzer NOx responses to the
generated NO concentrations reflect any NO2 impurity in the NO
working standard.

Calibration
Equipment Required
8. Plot the difference between the analyzer NOx and NO responses versus
FNO/FT. The slope of this plot is [NO2]IMP.
Zero Air A source of zero air free of contaminants should be used as described earlier
in this chapter. Contaminants can cause a detectable response on the
instrument and may also react with the NO, O3, or NO2 during the gas
phase titration.
Dynamic Parameter Use the following definitions for the remainder of this chapter.
Specifications for PR = Dynamic parameter specification to ensure complete reaction of the
Gas Titrator available O3, ppm-min
[NO]RC = NO concentration in the reaction chamber, ppm
tR = residence time of the reactant gases in the reaction chamber, min
[NO]STD = Concentration of the undiluted NO standard, ppm
FNO = NO flow rate, sccm
FO = O3 generator air flow rate, sccm
VRC = Volume of the reaction chamber, cc
FT = Analyzer demand plus 10 to 50% excess
The O3 generator (ozonator) airflow rate and the NO flow rate must be
adjusted such that the following relationships hold:
PR = [NO ]RC x t R 2.75 ppm - min
[NO ]RC = [NO ]STD FNO

( FO + FNO )
VRC < 2 min

tR =
FO + FNO
Determining GPT System Use the following procedure to determine the flow conditions to be used in
Flow Conditions the GPT system.
1. Determine FT, the total flow required at the output manifold, which
should be equal to the analyzer demand plus 10 to 50 percent excess.

Calibration
Equipment Required
2. Establish [NO]OUT as the highest NO concentration that will be

required at the output manifold. [NO]OUT should be about equal to
90% of the upper range limit (URL) of the NO2 concentration range to
be covered.
3. Determine FNO as:
[NO ] OUT x FT
FNO =
[NO ] STD
4. Select a convenient or available reaction chamber volume. Initially a

trial volume may be selected in the range of 200 to 500 cc.
5. Compute FO as:
[NO ] STD x FNO x V RC

FO = - FNO
2.75
6. Compute tR as:
VRC
tR =
FO + FNO
7. Verify that tR < 2 minutes. If not, select a reaction chamber with a

smaller VRC.
8. Compute the diluent air flow rate as:
FD = FT - FO - FNO
9. If FO turns out to be impractical for the desired system, select a reaction

chamber having a different VRC and recompute FD and FO.

Calibration
Pre-Calibration
Pre-Calibration Perform the following pre-calibration procedure before calibrating the

Model 42i. For detailed information about the menu parameters and the
icons used in these procedures, see the Operation chapter.
Note The calibration and calibration check duration times should be long
enough to account for the transition (purge) process when switching from
sample to zero and from zero to span. This transition time is the time
required to purge the existing air.
Depending on the plumbing configuration and the instrument, data from

approximately the first minute of a zero calibration or check should be
disregarded because of residual sample air. Also, data from approximately
the first minute of a span calibration or check should be disregarded
because the span is mixing with the residual zero air.
1. Allow the instrument to warm up and stabilize.
2. Be sure the ozonator is ON. If the ozonator is not ON:

a. Press to display the Main Menu, then choose Instrument
Controls > Ozonator.
b. Press to toggle the ozonator ON.
c. Press to return to the Run screen.
3. Be sure the instrument is in the auto mode, that is, NO, NO2, and
NOx measurements are being displayed on the front panel display. If
the instrument is not in auto mode:
a. Press to display the Main Menu, then choose Instrument
Controls > Auto/Manual Mode.
b. Select NO/NOx, and press .
c. Press to return to the Run screen.
4. Select NO, NO2, and NOx ranges, and push the AVG soft key to
display the Averaging Time screen. It is recommended that a higher
averaging time be used for best results. For more information about the
ranges or averaging time, see the Operation chapter.

Calibration
Calibration
Note The averaging time should be less than the zero duration and less
than the span duration.
5. Verify that any filters used during normal monitoring are also used
during calibration.
6. If required, connect the analog/digital outputs to a strip chart

recorder(s) or PC(s).
Calibration The following procedure calibrates the analyzer using the gas phase titrator
and zero gas generator described previously in this manual. It is suggested
that a calibration curve have at least seven points between the zero and full
scale NO concentrations. Although the seven-point curve is optional, two
of whatever number of points is chosen should be located at the zero and
90% levels and the remaining points equally spaced between these values.
Note When the instrument is equipped with internal zero/span and sample
valves, the ZERO and SPAN ports should give identical responses to the
SAMPLE port when test gases are introduced. The user should calibrate the
instrument using the SAMPLE port to introduce the zero and span gas
sources.
After calibration, the zero and span sources should be plumbed to the
appropriate ports on the rear panel of the instrument, and then
reintroduced to the instrument. The instrument should give identical
responses to the test gases whether they are introduced via the SAMPLE
port or the ZERO or SPAN ports. If not, the plumbing and/or valves
should be serviced.
Connect GPT Apparatus Use the following procedure to connect the GPT apparatus to the analyzer.
to the Analyzer
1. Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in Figure
41.
2. Ensure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use
against a reliable standard, such as a soap-bubble meter or wet-test
meter. All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 C and 760
mmHg.

Calibration
Calibration
3. Precautions should be taken to remove O2 and other contaminants

from the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of
calibration to avoid any conversion of NO to NO2. Failure to do so can
cause significant errors in calibration. This problem can be minimized
by:
a. Carefully evacuating the regulator after the regulator has been
connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve.
b. Thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO
after opening the cylinder valve.
c. Not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations
unless absolutely necessary.
4. Connect the analyzer sample bulkhead input to the output of the GPT
system.
Adjust Instrument Gain Use the following procedure to adjust the instrument gain. This includes:
Setting the NO and NOx background to zero
Calibrating the NO channel to the NO calibration gas
Calibrating the NOx channel to the NOx calibration gas
Set NO and NOx Background The NO and NOx background corrections are determined during zero
to Zero calibration. The background signal is the combination of electrical offsets,
PMT dark current, and trace substances undergoing chemiluminescence.
For more detailed information, see Calibrate NO and NOx Backgrounds
in the Operation chapter.
Use the following procedure to set the NO background. Both the NO and
NOx background screens operate the same way, therefore, the following
procedure also applies to the NOx background screen.
Note The NO channel should be calibrated first and then calibrate the
NOx channel.
For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in
these procedures, see the Operation chapter.
1. Determine the GPT flow conditions required to meet the dynamic

parameter specifications as indicated in Dynamic Parameter
Specifications for Gas Titrator earlier in this chapter.

Calibration
Calibration
2. Adjust the GPT diluent air and O3 generator air flows to obtain the
flows determined in Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Phase
Titrator earlier in this chapter. The total GPT airflow must exceed the
total demand of the analyzer. The Model 42i requires approximately
700 cc/min of sample flow, and a total GPT airflow of at least 1.5
liters/min is recommended.
a. Allow the analyzer to sample zero air until the NO, NOx, and NO2
responses stabilize.
b. After the responses have stabilized, from the Main Menu, choose
Calibration > Cal NO Background.
c. Press to set the NO reading to zero.
d. Press to return to the Calibration menu and repeat this
procedure to set the NOx background to zero.
e. Record the stable zero air responses as ZNO, ZNOX, and ZNO2
(recorder response, percent scale).
3. Adjust the NO flow from the standard NO cylinder to generate a NO

concentration of about 80% of the upper range limit (URL) of the NO
range. The exact NO concentration is calculated from:
x
[NO ] OUT = FNO NOSTD
FNO + FO + FD
Where:
[NO]OUT = Diluted NO concentration at the output manifold, ppm
NOSTD = No feed concentration
FNO = No flow
FO = Ozone flow
FD = Dilution flow
Calibrate the NO Channel to the Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO
NO Calibration Gas calibration gas.
1. Allow the analyzer to sample the NO calibration gas until the NO,
NO2, and NOx readings have stabilized.
2. When the responses stabilize, from the Main Menu, choose Calibration
> Cal NO Coefficient.

Calibration
Calibration
The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO

concentration. The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter
the NO calibration gas concentration.
Use to move the cursor left and right and use
to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor.
3. Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the

entered span concentration.
The NO recorder response will equal:
[NO ] OUT
Recorder Response (% scale) = x 100 + ZNO
URL
Where:
URL = Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel, ppm
4. Record the [NO]OUT concentration and the analyzer NO response as

indicated by the recorder response.
Calibrate the NOx Channel to the Use the following procedure to calibrate the NOx channel to the NOx
NOx Calibration Gas calibration gas.
1. Press to return to the Calibration menu, and choose Cal NOx

Coefficient.
2. Verify that the NOx calibration gas concentration is the same as the
NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO2 impurity.
The NOx line of the Calibrate NOx screen displays the current NOx
the NOx calibration gas concentration.
3. Press to calculate and save the new NOx coefficient based on the
4. Press to return to the Run screen. The exact NOx concentration

is calculated from:

Calibration
Calibration
FNO x ([NO ] STD + [ NO2 ]IMP)

[ NOx ]OUT =
FNO + FO + FD
Where:
[NOx] OUT = diluted NOx concentration at the output manifold, ppm
[NO2] IMP = concentration of NO2 impurity in the standard NO cylinder, ppm
The NOx recorder response will equal:
[ NO x ]OUT
Recorder Response (% scale) = x 100 + Z NOx
URL
Where:
URL = Nominal upper range limit of the NOx channel, ppm
5. Record the NOx concentration and the analyzer's NOx response.
Preparing NO, NOx, and Use the following procedures to prepare the NO, NOx, and NO2
NO2 Calibration Curves calibration curves.
1. Generate several additional NO and NOx concentrations by decreasing

FNO or increasing FD.
2. For each concentration generated, calculate the exact NO and NOx

concentrations using the above equations for [NO]OUT and [NOx]OUT.
3. Record the NO and NOx responses.
4. Plot the analyzer responses versus the respective calculated NO and

NOx concentrations and draw or calculate the respective calibration
curves. For subsequent calibrations where linearity can be assumed,
these curves may be checked with a three-point calibration consisting of
a zero point, NO and NOx concentrations of approximately 80% of the
URL, and an intermediate concentration.
5. Adjust the GPT system to generate a NO concentration near 90% of

the URL of the instrument range selected.

Calibration
Calibration
6. Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NOx responses have

stabilized, then measure and record the NO concentration as [NO]ORIG.
7. Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3 to

produce a decrease in the NO concentration equivalent to about 80%
of the URL of the NO2 range. The decrease must not exceed 90% of
the NO concentration determined in Steps 5 and 6 above.
8. When the analyzer responses stabilize, record the resultant NO

concentrations as [NO]REM.
9. From the Main Menu choose Calibration > Cal NO2 Coefficient.
The NO2 line of the Calibrate NO2 screen displays the current NO2
the NO2 calibration gas concentration.
10. Set the NO2 calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the
following: the NO2 concentration generated by GPT, ([NO]ORIG -
[NO]REM), and any NO2 impurity.
FNO x [ NO2 ]IMP

[ NO2 ]OUT = ([NO ]ORIG - [NO ]REM ) +
FNO + FO + FD
Where:
[NO2]OUT = diluted NO2 concentration at the output manifold, ppm
[NO]ORIG = original NO concentration, prior to addition of O3, ppm
[NO]REM = NO concentration remaining after addition of O3, ppm
11. Press to calculate and save the new NO2 coefficient based on the
The analyzer does a one point NO2 span coefficient calculation,
corrects the NO2 reading for converter inefficiency, and then adds the
corrected NO2 to the NO signal to give a corrected NOx signal.
If the analyzer calculates a NO2 span coefficient of less than 0.96, either
the entered NO2 concentration is incorrect, the converter is not being
heated to the proper temperature, the instrument needs servicing (leak
or imbalance), or the converter needs replacement or servicing. The

Calibration
Calibration
NO2 analog output will reflect the NO2 concentration generated by

GPT, any NO2 impurity, and the NO2 zero offset.
The recorder response will be as follows:
[ NO2 ]OUT
Recorder Response (% scale) = x 100 + ZNO2
URL
Where:
URL = Nominal upper range limit of the NO2 channel, ppm
12. Record the NO2 concentration and the analyzer's NO2 response.
13. Maintaining the same FNO, FO, and FD, adjust the ozone generator to
obtain several other concentrations of NO2 over the NO2 range (at least
five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested).
14. Record the stable responses and plot the analyzer's NO2 responses
versus the corresponding calculated (using the above equation for
[NO2]OUT) concentrations and draw or calculate the NO2 calibration
curve.
Note It is important that the curve be linear within 1% FS over the NO2
range. If the curve is nonlinear, the analyzer is not operating correctly,
(possible leak, or converter failure, etc.), and should be serviced. Assuming
the curve is linear, subsequent data should be reduced using this NO2
calibration curve response.
Using the Calibration Factors menu can change the calibration factors.
This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation. However, after the above
calibration procedure is completed, all subsequent data reduction depends
on the calibration parameters, remaining the same as during the initial
calibration.
Therefore, never change any calibration factor without first recording the
value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed, the initial
value can be re-entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration.

Calibration
Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode
Alternative Calibration Although it is recommended that a GPT system be used to calibrate the
Procedure Using NO2 analyzer, the procedure described in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title
40, Part 50, Appendix F using a NO2 permeation tube may be used as an
Permeation Tube alternative procedure for calibrating the instrument.
Calibration in Dual The dual/auto range calibration feature is used to calibrate the analyzer at
two different span levels (as opposed to a single span level in the standard
Range and Auto mode) generating a tailored multi-point calibration curve stored in the
Range Mode analyzer's memory. This feature may be used:
When widely different gas levels are being monitored, such as a factor
of 10 or greater apart
If precision and span levels are being introduced using separate tanks
If more than one multi-component cylinder is being used to calibrate
the instrument
Properly designed chemiluminescence analyzers are inherently linear over a
wide dynamic range; and under normal USEPA compliance situations this
feature is not required. Dual calibration may be used for span levels less
than a factor of 10 apart, however if this is done to correct for a significant
non-linearity, it may mask the problems causing the effect, such as, bad
calibration cylinder, leaks in sampling lines, or low ozonator output.
Use the following procedures to calibrate the analyzer in dual or auto range
mode.
Set NO and NOx Use the following procedure to set the NO and NOx background readings
Background Readings to to zero. Both the Set NO background and NOx background screens
operate the same way, and the following procedure also applies to the NO
Zero and NOx background screen.
For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in
these procedures, see the Operation chapter.
1. Follow the Pre-Calibration procedure described previously in this

chapter.
2. Introduce zero air to the SAMPLE bulkhead and allow the analyzer to
sample zero air until the NO, NOx, and NO2 responses stabilize.

Calibration
3. When the responses stabilize, from the Main Menu choose Calibration
> Calibrate NO Background.
4. The Set NO Background screen displays the current NO background

and NO concentration.
5. Press to set the NO background to zero.
6. Press to return to the Run screen.
7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6, selecting Cal NOx Background to set the

NOx backgrounds to zero.
Calibrate Low NO Use the following procedure to calibrate NO channel to the NO

calibration gas.
1. Disconnect the source of zero air from the SAMPLE bulkhead. In its
place, connect a source of NO calibration gas of about 80% of the low
NO full-scale range.
2. Allow the analyzer to sample the low NO calibration gas until the NO,
NO2, and NOx readings stabilize.
3. When the responses are stabile, from the Main Menu choose
Calibration > Cal Lo NO Coefficient.
4. The Lo NO field displays the current NO concentration.

The Lo NO Span Conc field is where you enter the low NO calibration
gas concentration.
5. Press to calculate and save the new low NO coefficient based on

the entered span concentration.
Calibrate Low NOx Use the following procedure to calibrate the NOx channel to the NOx
calibration gas.

Calibration
1. Press to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal Lo NOx

Coefficient.
2. Verify that the low NOx calibration gas concentration is the same as the
low NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO2 impurity.
The Lo NOx field displays the current NOx concentration. The Lo
NOx Span Conc field is where you enter the low NOx calibration gas
concentration.
3. Press to calculate and save the new low NOx coefficient based on
Calibrate Low NO2 Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO2 channel to the NO2
calibration gas.
1. Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3

to produce a decrease in the low NO concentration equivalent to about
80% of the URL of the low NO2 range. The decrease must not exceed
90% of the low NO concentration determined in the Calibrate Low
NOx procedure.
2. From the Main Menu choose Calibration > Cal Lo NO2 Coefficient.
The Lo NO2 field displays the current NO2 concentration. The Lo
NO2 Span Conc field is where you enter the Lo NO2 calibration gas
concentration.
3. Set the low NO2 calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the
NO2 concentration generated by GPT and any NO2 impurity.
4. Press to calculate and save the new low NO2 coefficient based on

Calibration
Calibrate High NO Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO
calibration gas.
1. Connect a source of high NO calibration gas of about 80% of the high

NO full-scale range. Allow the analyzer to sample the high NO
calibration gas until the NO, NO2, and NOx readings have stabilized.
2. After the responses have stabilized, from the Main Menu, choose
Calibration > Cal Hi NO Coefficient.
The Hi NO field displays the current NO concentration. The Hi NO
Span Conc field is where you enter the high NO calibration gas
concentration.
3. Press to calculate and save the new high NO coefficient based on

Calibrate High NOx Use the following procedure to calibrate the NOx channel to the NOx
calibration gas.
1. Press to return to the Calibration menu, and choose Cal Hi

NOx Coefficient.
2. Verify that the high NOx calibration gas concentration is the same as
the high NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO2
impurity.
3. Press to calculate and save the new high NOx coefficient based
on the entered span concentration.
Calibrate High NO2 Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO2 channel to the NO2
calibration gas.

Calibration
Zero and Span Check
1. Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3 to

produce a decrease in the high NO concentration equivalent to about
80% of the URL of the high NO2 range. The decrease must not exceed
90% of the high NO concentration determined in the Calibrate High
NOx procedure.
2. From the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Cal Hi NO2 Coefficient.
The Hi NO2 field displays the current NO2 concentration. The Hi
NO2 Span Conc field is where you enter the high NO2 calibration gas
concentration.
3. Set the high NO2 calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the
NO2 concentration generated by GPT and any NO2 impurity.
4. Press to calculate and save the new high NO2 coefficient based
on the entered span concentration.
You can change the calibration factors by using the Calibration Factors
menu. This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation. However, after
the above calibration procedure is completed, all subsequent data reduction
depends on the calibration parameters remaining the same as during the
initial calibration.
Therefore never change any calibration factor without first recording the
value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed, the initial
value can be re-entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration.
Zero and Span Check The analyzer requires initial and periodic calibration according to the
procedures outlined in this manual. Initially, the frequency of the
calibration procedure should be determined by the stability of the zero and
span checks, which may be run daily. You should generate a new
calibration curve when zero and span checks indicate a shift in instrument
gain of more than 10 percent from that determined during the most recent
multipoint calibration. You can adjust the frequency of calibration and
even zero and span checks appropriately as you gain confidence with the
instrument.
You should have a quality control plan where the frequency and the
number of points required for calibration can be modified on the basis of
calibration and zero and span check data collected over a period of time.
Note however, that the EPA requires a minimum of one multipoint
calibration per calendar quarter. Such a quality control program is essential

Calibration
Zero and Span Check
to ascertain the accuracy and reliability of the air quality data collected and
to alert the user if the accuracy or reliability of the data should become
unacceptable. A compilation of this kind might include items such as dates
of calibration, atmospheric conditions, calibration factors, and other
pertinent data.
Use the following procedure to perform a zero and span check.
1. Connect the zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead in a standard

instrument or to the ZERO bulkhead in a Model 42i equipped with
the zero/span and sample solenoid valve option.
2. Allow the instrument to sample zero gas until a stable reading is

obtained on the NO, NO2, and NOx channels then record the zero
readings. Unless the zero has changed by more than 0.010 ppm, it is
recommended that the zero not be adjusted. If an adjustment larger
than this is indicated due to a change in zero reading, a new multipoint
calibration curve should be generated.
3. Attach a supply of known concentration of NO and NO2 (usually

generated via an NIST traceable NO working standard and a GPT
system) to the SAMPLE bulkhead (or SPAN bulkhead for instruments
equipped with the zero/span and sample solenoid valve option) on the
rear panel.
4. Allow the instrument to sample the calibration gas until a stable

reading is obtained on the NO, NO2, and NOx channels. If the
calibration has changed by more than 10%, a new multipoint
calibration curve should be generated.
5. When the calibration check has been completed, record the NO, NO2,
and NOx values.
6. Reconnect the analyzer sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead.

Chapter 5
Preventive Maintenance
This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be
performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation. Since usage and
environmental conditions vary greatly, you should inspect the components
frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined.
This chapter includes the following maintenance information and
replacement procedures:
Safety Precautions on page 5-1
Replacement Parts on page 5-2
Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5-2
Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement on page 5-2
Capillaries Inspection and Replacement on page 5-2
Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning on page 5-4
Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning on page 5-4
Pump Rebuilding on page 5-5
Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this
chapter.
WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the

manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired
Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external
fittings.
Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small

amounts of static electricity. A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must
be worn while handling any internal component. For more information
about appropriate safety precautions, see the Servicing chapter.

Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts.
Cleaning the Outside Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the
labels on the case.
Case
Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to
clean the outside case.
Ozonator Air Feed Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator air feed drying
column.
Drying Column
Replacement 1. Remove the drying column from the connector DRY AIR bulkhead on
the rear panel of the instrument.
2. Replace spent absorbent material (indicating Drierite or silica gel) with

new or regenerated material.
3. Reinstall the drying column to the DRY AIR bulkhead.
4. Perform a Zero/Span check (see the Calibration chapter).
Capillaries Inspection The capillaries normally only require inspection when instrument
performance indicates that there may be a flow problem.
and Replacement
Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the capillaries. This
procedure can be used to check any or all of the capillaries.
1. Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the instrument cover.

Capillaries Inspection and Replacement
3. Locate the capillary holders. See Figure 51 and Figure 72.
Cajon Fitting
Capillary
Capillary O-Ring
Reaction Chamber Front
Figure 51. Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries
4. Remove the Cajon fitting(s) from the reaction chamber body using a
5/8-inch wrench being careful not to lose the ferrule or O-ring.
5. Remove the glass capillaries, ferrule, and O-ring. Inspect O-ring for
cuts or abrasion, and replace as necessary.
6. Check capillary for particulate deposits. Clean or replace as necessary.
7. Replace capillary in reaction chamber body, making sure the O-ring is

around the capillary before inserting it into the body.
8. Replace Cajon fitting. Note that the Cajon fitting should be

tightened slightly more than hand tight.
9. Reconnect tubing to top of fittings, being careful to insert ferrule and

O-ring properly, and tighten knurled nut finger tight.
10. Re-install the cover.

Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning
11. Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON.
Thermoelectric Cooler Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the thermoelectric cooler
fins.
Fins Inspection and
Cleaning
1. Turn the instrument off and unplug the power cord.
3. Locate the PMT cooler (Figure 72 and Figure 76).
4. Blow off the cooler fins using clean pressurized air. It may be more
convenient to vacuum the cooler fins. In either case, make sure that any
particulate accumulation between the fins has been removed.
5. If necessary, use a small brush to remove residual particulate

accumulation.
6. Replace the cover.
7. Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON.
Fan Filters Inspection Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filters.
and Cleaning
1. Remove the two fan guards from the fans and remove the filters.
2. Flush the filters with warm water and let dry (a clean, oil-free purge will
help the drying process) or blow the filters clean with compressed air.
3. Re-install the filters and fan guards.

Pump Rebuilding
Mounting Screws (4)
Filter
Fan Guard
Figure 52. Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters
Pump Rebuilding Use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 53. To replace
the pump, see Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter.
Equipment Required:
Pump Repair Kit
Allen Wrench, 3 mm
Wrench, 9/16-inch
Needlenose Pliers

1. Turn instrument off, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.
2. Loosen fittings and remove both lines going to the pump.
3. To ensure proper reassembly, mark the position of the pump head by

using a pencil or other marker to draw a line from the top plate down
across the bottom plate to the pump body. Refer to this reference line
when reassembling the pump head.

Pump Rebuilding
4. Remove four screws from top plate using the 3 mm Allen wrench.
5. Remove top plate, flapper valve, and bottom plate.
6. Using needlenose pliers, remove clamping disk holding diaphragm and

Teflon protection wafer onto clamping rod, and remove the diaphragm
and Teflon wafer.

Pump Rebuilding
Top Plate Screws (4)

Top Plate
Flapper Valve
Bottom Plate
Clamping Disk
Teflon Protection Wafer
Diaphragm
Diaphragm Mounting Disk
Figure 53. Rebuilding the Pump
7. Assemble pump by following above procedure in reverse. Refer to the

marks you made in Step three to position the components. Make sure
not to over-tighten clamping disk. Be sure that the Teflon side of
diaphragm faces up and that the flapper valves cover the holes of the
top and bottom plate.

Pump Rebuilding
8. Re-install the cover, reconnect the power cord, and turn the instrument
ON.
9. Check that the reaction chamber pressure reads between 150 and 250
mmHg.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability. In
the event of problems or failure, the troubleshooting guidelines, board-level
connection diagrams, connector pin descriptions, and testing procedures
presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying
problems.
For additional fault location information refer to the Preventive
Maintenance chapter in this manual.
The service mode in the Operation chapter includes parameters and
functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing
problems.
The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also
be consulted in the event of problems. See Service Locations on page 6-
21 for contact information. In any correspondence with the factory, please
note both the serial number and program number of the instrument.
This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support
information:
Troubleshooting Guides on page 6-1
Board-Level Connection Diagrams on page 6-6
Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-8
Service Locations on page 6-21
Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before
performing any actions listed in this chapter.
Troubleshooting The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help
isolate and identify instrument problems.
Guides
Table 61 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the
checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Guides
Table 62 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display
and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition.
See Alarms Menu in the Operation chapter for detailed information.
Table 61. Troubleshooting - General Guide

Malfunction Possible Cause Action
Does not start up No power Check that the instrument is
plugged into the proper source
(115 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60Hz).
Check instrument fuses.
Power Supply Check voltages using a digital
voltmeter.
No output signal (or No sample gas reaching the Check input sample flow.
very low output) analyzer
Ruptured pump diaphragm Rebuild pump head.
Blocked sample capillary Unplug power cord. Clean or
replace capillary.
No ozone reaching the reaction Check the Instrument Control
chamber menu to see if the ozonator is
ON. If it is ON, check dry air
supply.
No output signal Disconnected or defective input Unplug power cord. Check that
or high voltage supply cables are connected properly.
Check cable resistance.
Analyzer not calibrated Recalibrate.
Defective 15 volt Check supply voltages
(Diagnostics menu).
Calibration Drift Dryer to ozonator depleted Replace.
Line voltage fluctuations Check to see if line voltage is
within specifications.
Defective pump Rebuild pump.
Unstable NO or NO2 source Replace.
Clogged capillaries Unplug power cord. Clean or
replace capillary.
Clogged sample air filter Replace filter element.
Excessive Noise Defective or low sensitivity Unplug power cord. Remove
PMT PMT. Install known good PMT.
Plug in power cord. Check
performance.
Defective input board Replace board.

Troubleshooting
Malfunction Possible Cause Action

Defective cooler Check temperature (less than -
2 C at Tamb = 25 C).
Non-linear response Incorrect calibration source Verify accuracy of multipoint
calibration source gas.
Leak in sample probe line Check for variable dilution.
Excessive response Partially blocked sample Unplug power cord. Clean or
time capillary replace capillary.
Hang up/blockage in sample Change element.
filter
Improper converter Questionable calibration gas Verify accuracy.
operation
Converter temperature too high Temperature should be
or too low approximately 325 C for
Molybdenum, 625 C for
stainless steel.
Low line voltage Check to see if line voltage is
within specifications.
Molybdenum consumed Replace Molybdenum converter
cartridge.

Troubleshooting
Table 62. Troubleshooting - Alarm Messages
Alarm Message Possible Cause Action

Alarm - Internal Temp Check fan operation Replace fan if not operating
properly.
Check fan filter Clean or replace foam filter,
refer to Preventive
Maintenance chapter in this
manual.
Alarm - Chamber Temp Chamber temperature below set Check 10K ohm thermistor,
point of 50 C replace if bad.
Check temperature control
board to insure the LEDs are
coming on. If not, temperature
control board could be
defective.
Alarm - Cooler Temp Check fan operation Replace defective fan.
Check fan filter Clean or replace foam filter.
Cooler reads 80 C Bad cooler Replace cooler.
Cooler does not hold set point Replace cooler
of -3 C thermoelectric module inside
cooler failed.
Cooler reads -20 C Replace cooler thermocouple
bad.
Alarm - Conv. Temp Converter temperature low Molybdenum converter should
be hot to the touch, if not the
heater may have failed. Check
that converter temp. set point
is approximately 325 C. Check
that voltage to the heater is
115 VAC.
Alarm - Perm Gas Temp Incorrect Perm oven set Check that the alarm settings
temperature or alarm settings match the set temp.
Perm oven heater thermistor or Calibrate the thermistor.
gas thermistor is out of
calibration
Perm oven failure Replace the Perm oven.
Alarm - Pressure High pressure indication Check the pump for a tear in
the diaphragm, replace with
pump repair kit if necessary.
Refer to Preventive
Maintenance chapter in this
manual. Check that capillaries
are properly installed and O-
rings are in good shape.

Troubleshooting
Alarm Message Possible Cause Action

Replace if necessary. Check
flow system for leaks.
Alarm - Flow Flow low Check sample capillary (0.020
inch ID) for blockage. Replace
as necessary.
If using sample particulate
filter make sure it is not
blocked. Disconnect sample
particulate filter from the
sample bulkhead, if flow
increases, replace the filter.
Alarm Ozonator Flow Ozone flow low Check ozone capillary (0.008
inch ID) for blockage. Replace
as necessary.
Alarm - Zero Check Instrument out of calibration Recalibrate instrument.
Alarm - Span Check
Alarm - Zero Autocal Check gas supply. Perform
Alarm - Span Autocal manual calibration.
Alarm NO, NO2, NOx Concentration has exceeded Check to insure range
Conc. range limit corresponds with expected
value. If not select proper
range.
Concentration low Check user-defined low set
point, set to zero.
Alarm - Motherboard Internal cables not connected Check that all internal cables
Status properly are connected properly.
Alarm - Interface Board is defective Recycle AC power to
Status instrument. If still alarming,
change board.
Alarm - I/O Exp Status

Troubleshooting
Board-Level Connection Diagrams
Board-Level Figure 61 and Figure 62 are board-level connection diagrams for the
common electronics and measurement system. These illustrations can be
Connection used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 63 through Table
Diagrams 69 to troubleshoot board-level faults.
I/OEXPANSION
BOARD
EXPANSION I/O J1
25 Pin
TOMEASUREMENT SYSTEM
DIGITAL OUTPUT
BOARD
DIGITAL J2
37 Pin
OUTPUTS
11 Pin 8 Pin
J14 J3
J2
RS232/RS485 P1:A FRONT 14 Pin LCD
9 Pi n PANEL DISPLAY
J1 J4
RS232/RS485 J18 BOARD
9 Pin P1:B 34 Pin 3 Pin
10 -BASE -T J2 J3 KEY PANEL

8 Pin 8 Pin
EXPANSION RS485 J15

15 Pin MOTHERBOARD J4 SPARE DATA
8 Pin
ANALOG OUTPUTS
/DIGITAL INPUTS 37 Pin J5
DATA
J1 IPJ8
3 Pin
3 Pin
J10
2 Pin
POWER_GOOD
J17
2 Pin
PJ1 PJ3 PJ2
3 Pin 3 Pin 3 Pin
24VDC
AC POWER SUPPLY
REAR PANEL AC 24VDC
AC INPUT 3 Cond P1
2 Pin
AC
FRON T PANEL
POWER SW PJ6
TRANSFORMER 3 Pin
(90VACor 240VAC
OPTIONS)
Figure 61. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Common Electronics

Troubleshooting
Board-Level Connection Diagrams
INPUT BOARD Coax

MJ8 J2 J1 PMT ANODE
10 Pin 2 Cond
PMT HVPS
MJ10 PMT
7 Pin 2 Cond
TOCOMMON ELECTRONICS CHAMBERPRESSURE

MJ3
4 Pin
MJ15 SAMPLEFLOW
5 Pin
MJ14 OZ FLOWSW
3 Pin
OJ1 OZONATOR
2 Pin
PJ7 COOLER
MEASUREMENT 4 Pin
INTERFACEBOARD
MJ9 AMBIENT TEMP. THERM.
2 Pin
POJ1 GAS THERM.

2 Pin PERM OVEN
(OPTIONAL)
HEATER(15V, 1W)
POJ3 & OVEN THERM.
DATA 4 Pin
J1 IPJ8
3 Pin
PJ9 NO/NOX SOL.
2 Pin
PJ10 SAMPLESOL.
2 Pin
PJ11 ZERO/SPAN SOL.
2 Pin
PJ12 SPARE1 SOL.
2 Pin
PJ13 SPARE2 SOL.
2 Pin
24VDC PJ4 FAN1

2 Pin
P1 PJ5 2 Pin FAN2
2 Pin
AC BENCHHEATER(60w)
TEMP J3
MJ17 J1 4 Pin
6 Pin CONTROL AC
J4 CONVERTERHEATER(90W)
AC 3 Pin
AC PJ8 J2
2 Pin J5 CONVERTERTHERMOCOUPLE
PJ3 PJ6 2 Pin
3 Pin AC
PJ1 PUMP
3 Pin
Figure 62. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Measurement System

Troubleshooting
Connector Pin Descriptions
Connector Pin The connector pin descriptions in Table 63 through Table 69 can be
used along with the board-level connection diagrams to troubleshoot
Descriptions board-level faults.
Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-8
Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-13
Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram on page 6-15
I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-
17
Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-18
Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-20
Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6-20
Table 63. Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions

Connector Reference Pin Signal Description
Label Designator
INTF DATA J1 1 Ground
2 +RS485 to Interface Board
3 -RS485 to Interface Board
10-BASE-T J2 1 Ethernet Output (+)
2 Ethernet Output (-)
3 Ethernet Input (+)
4 NC
5 NC
6 Ethernet Input (-)
7 NC
8 NC
EXPANSION BD J3 1 +5V
2 +24V
3 +24V
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 +RS485 to Expansion Board

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
8 -RS485 to Expansion Board
SPARE DATA J4 1 +5V
2 +24V
3 +24V
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 +RS485 to Spare Board
8 -RS485 to Spare Board
I/O J5 1 Power Fail Relay N.C. Contact
2 Ground
3 TTL Input 1
4 TTL Input 2
5 Ground
6 TTL Input 5
7 TTL Input 7
8 TTL Input 8
9 TTL Input 10
10 Ground
11 TTL Input 13
12 TTL Input 15
13 Ground
14 Analog Voltage 1
15 Analog Voltage 3
16 Ground
17 Analog Voltage 5
18 Ground
19 Ground
20 Power Fail Relay COM
21 Power Fail Relay N.O. Contact
22 Ground
23 TTL Input 3
24 TTL Input 4
25 TTL Input 6

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
26 Ground
27 TTL Input 9
28 TTL Input 11
29 TTL Input 12
30 TTL Input 14
31 TTL Input 16
32 Ground
33 Analog Voltage 2
34 Analog Voltage 4
35 Ground
36 Analog Voltage 6
37 Ground
SER EN J7 1 Serial Enable Jumper
2 +3.3V
24V IN J10 1 +24V
2 Ground
DIGITAL I/O J14 1 +5V
2 +24V
3 +24V
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 SPI Reset
8 SPI Input
9 SPI Output
10 SPI Board Select
11 SPI Clock
EXT. RS485 J15 1 -RS485 to Rear Panel
2 -RS485 to Rear Panel
3 +5V
4 +5V
5 +5V
6 Ground
7 Ground

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
8 Ground
9 NC
10 NC
11 +24
12 +24
13 +24
14 +24
15 +24
24 MONITOR J17 1 24V Power Monitor
2 Ground
FRONT PANEL J18 1 Ground
BD
2 Ground
3 LCLK LCD Signal
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 LLP LCD Signal
7 LFLM LCD Signal
8 LD4 LCD Signal
9 LD0 LCD Signal
10 LD5 LCD Signal
11 LD1 LCD Signal
12 LD6 LCD Signal
13 LD2 LCD Signal
14 LD7 LCD Signal
15 LD3 LCD Signal
16 LCD Bias Voltagel
17 +5V
18 Ground
19 Ground
20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal
21 Keypad Row 2 Input

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
25 Keypad Col 2 Select
29 Ground
30 Ground
31 Ground
32 Ground
33 +24V
34 +24V
RS232/RS485:A P1:A 1 NC
2 Serial Port 1 RX (-RS485 IN)
3 Serial Port 1 TX (-RS485 OUT)
4 NC
5 Ground
6 NC
7 Serial Port 1 RTS (+RS485 OUT)
8 Serial Port 1 CTS (+RS485 IN)
9 NC
RS232/RS485:B P1:B 1 NC
2 Serial Port 2 RX (-RS485 IN)
3 Serial Port 2 TX (-RS485 OUT)
4 NC
5 Ground
6 NC
7 Serial Port 2 RTS (+RS485 OUT)
8 Serial Port 2 CTS (+RS485 IN)
9 NC
AC IN PJ1 1 AC-HOT
2 AC-NEUT
3 AC-Ground
AC 24VPWR PJ2 1 AC-HOT
2 AC-NEUT

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
3 AC-Ground
AC INTF BD PJ3 1 AC-HOT
2 AC-NEUT
3 AC-Ground
Table 64. Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions

Label Designator
DATA IPJ8 1 Ground
2 +RS485 from Motherboard
3 -RS485 from Motherboard
PRES MJ3 1 Pressure Sensor Input
2 Ground
3 +15V
4 -15V
INPUT BD MJ8 1 +15V
2 Ground
3 -15V
4 +5V
5 Ground
6 Measurement Frequency Output
7 Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage
8 SPI Output
9 SPI Clock
10 SPI Board Select
AMB TEMP MJ9 1 Ambient Temperature Thermistor
2 Ground
HVPS MJ10 1 HV Power Supply Voltage Adjust
2 Ground
3 HV Power Supply On/Off
4 Ground
5 HV Power Supply Voltage Monitor
6 Ground

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
7 Ground
FLOW SW MJ14 1 NC
2 Ground
3 Ozonator Flow OK Switch
FLOW MJ15 1 Flow Sensor Input
2 Ground
3 +15V
4 -15V
5 Ground
TEMP CTRL MJ17 1 Bench Temperature Input
2 Ground
3 -15V
4 Converter Heater On/Off
5 Converter Temperature Input
6 +15V_PWR
OZONATOR OJ1 1 Ozonator Output A
2 Ozonator Output B
24V IN P1 1 +24V
2 Ground
AC PUMP PJ1 1 AC-HOT
2 AC-NEUT
3 AC-Ground
FAN 1 PJ4 1 +24V
2 Ground
FAN 2 PJ5 1 +24V
2 Ground
AC IN PJ6 1 AC-HOT
2 AC-NEUT
3 AC-Ground
COOLER PJ7 1 Cooler Thermistor
2 Ground
3 +15V_PWR
4 Cooler On/Off Control
AC TEMP PJ8 1 AC-HOT

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
2 AC-NEUT
3 AC-Ground
NO/NOX SOL. PJ9 1 +24V
2 NO/NOX Solenoid Control
SAMPLE SOL. PJ10 1 +24V
2 Sample Solenoid Control
Z/S SOL. PJ11 1 +24V
2 Zero/Span Solenoid Control
SPARE1 SOL. PJ12 1 +24V
2 Spare 1 Solenoid Control
SPARE2 SOL. PJ13 1 +24V
2 Spare 2 Solenoid Control
PERM OVEN POJ1 1 Perm Oven Gas Thermistor
THERM
2 Ground
PERM OVEN POJ3 1 Perm Oven Heater On/Off
2 +15V_PWR
3 Perm Oven Thermistor
4 Ground
Table 65. Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram

Label Designator
MOTHER BOARD J1 1 Ground
2 Ground
3 LCLK LCD Signal
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 LLP LCD Signal
7 LFLM LCD Signal
8 LD4 LCD Signal
9 LD0 LCD Signal
10 LD5 LCD Signal
11 LD1 LCD Signal

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
12 LD6 LCD Signal
13 LD2 LCD Signal
14 LD7 LCD Signal
15 LD3 LCD Signal
16 LCD Bias Voltage
17 +5V
18 Ground
19 Ground
20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal
29 Ground
30 Ground
31 Ground
32 Ground
33 +24V
34 +24V
LCD DATA J2 1 LD0_5V LCD Signal
2 LD1_5V LCD Signal
3 LD2_5V LCD Signal
4 LD3_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal
5 LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal
6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal
7 NC
8 LLP_5V LCD Signal
9 LCLK_5V LCD Signal
10 +5V
11 Ground

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
12 -25V
13 LCD Bias Voltage
14 Ground
KEYBOARD J3 1 Keypad Row 1 Input
LCD BACKLIGHT J4 1 +5V Supply
2 NC
3 Ground
Table 66. I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Connector Pin Descriptions

Label Designator
EXPANSION I/O J1 1 Analog Voltage Input 1
2 Analog Voltage Input 2
4 Ground
8 Ground
11 Ground
12 NC
13 Current Output Return
14 Ground
15 Current Output 1

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
17 Current Output 2
19 Current Output 3
21 Current Output 4
23 Current Output 5
25 Current Output 6
MOTHER BD J2 1 +5V
2 +24V
3 +24V
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 +RS485 to Motherboard
8 -RS485 to Motherboard
Table 67. Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions

Label Designator
MOTHER BD J1 1 +5V
2 +24V
3 +24V
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 SPI Reset
8 SPI Input
9 SPI Output
10 SPI Board Select
11 SPI Clock

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
DIGITAL J2 1 Relay 1 Contact a
OUTPUTS
2 Relay 2 Contact a
3 Relay 3 Contact a
4 Relay 4 Contact a
5 Relay 5 Contact a
6 Relay 6 Contact a
7 Relay 7 Contact a
8 Relay 8 Contact a
9 Relay 9 Contact a
10 Relay 10 Contact a
11 NC
12 Solenoid Drive Output 1
20 Relay 1 Contact b
30 +24V
31 +24V
32 +24V
33 +24V

Troubleshooting

Label Designator
34 +24V
35 +24V
36 +24V
37 +24V
Table 68. Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions

Label Designator
PMT IN J1 1 PMT Input
2 Ground
INTF BD J2 1 +15V
2 Ground
3 -15V
4 +5V
5 Ground
6 Measurement Frequency Output
7 Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage
8 SPI Input
9 SPI Clock
10 SPI Board Select
Table 69. Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions

Label Designator
INTERFACE J1 1 Bench Temperature Input
2 Ground
3 -15V
4 Converter Heater On/Off
5 Converter Temperature Input
6 +15V_PWR
AC INPUT J2 1 AC-HOT
2 AC-NEUT
BENCH J3 1 Bench Heater AC Output

Troubleshooting
Service Locations

Label Designator
2 Bench Heater AC Return
3 Ground
4 Bench Thermistor
CONVERTER J4 1 Ground
2 Converter Heater AC Output
3 Converter Heater AC Return
CONV TC J5 1 Converter Thermocouple TC
2 Converter Thermocouple TC+
SS TEMP J6 1 SS Temperature Range Jumper A
2 SS Temperature Range Jumper B
Service For additional assistance, service is available from exclusive distributors

worldwide. Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support
Locations and technical information or visit us on the web at www.thermo.com/aqi.
1-866-282-0430 Toll Free


Chapter 7
Servicing
This chapter explains how to replace the Model 42i subassemblies. It
assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be
replaced.
For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance
chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual.
The service mode in the Operation chapter also includes parameters and
functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing
problems.
For additional service assistance, see Service Locations at the end of this
chapter.
This chapter includes the following parts information and component
replacement procedures:
Firmware Updates on page 7-4
Accessing the Service Mode on page 7-4
Replacement Parts List on page 7-4
Cable List on page 7-6
External Device Connection Components on page 7-6
Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel
on page 7-8
Pump Replacement on page 7-9
Fan/Filter Replacement on page 7-10
PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement on page
7-11
Photomultiplier Tube Replacement on page 7-13
PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement on page 7-14
PMT Voltage Adjustment on page 7-16
Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal on page 7-17

Servicing
Safety Precautions
NO2-to-NO Converter Replacement on page 7-18

Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7-20
Ozonator Assembly Replacement on page 7-21
Ozonator Transformer Replacement on page 7-23
Input Board Replacement on page 7-23
Input Board Calibration on page 7-25
DC Power Supply Replacement on page 7-25
Analog Output Testing on page 7-26
Analog Output Calibration on page 7-29
Analog Input Calibration on page 7-30
Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement on page 7-31
Pressure Transducer Calibration on page 7-32
Temperature Control Board Replacement on page 7-34
Ambient Temperature Calibration on page 7-35
Fuse Replacement on page 7-36
Scrubber Replacement on page 7-36
I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement on page 7-37
Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7-39
Motherboard Replacement on page 7-39
Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7-40
Flow Transducer Replacement on page 7-41
Flow Transducer Calibration on page 7-42
Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7-44
LCD Module Replacement on page 7-45
Service Locations on page 7-46
Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this
chapter.
WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified

service representatives.

Servicing
Safety Precautions
If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the

manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
CAUTION Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure. Avoid

contact with converter heated components.
Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter

components.

be worn while handling any internal component (Figure 71). If an
antistatic wrist strap is not available, be sure to touch the instrument chassis
before touching any internal components. When the instrument is
unplugged, the chassis is not at earth ground.
Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges.
Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source. This can

permanently damage the tube.
Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module.
The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile, handle it carefully.
Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth, it may easily
scratch the plate.
Do not use alcohol, acetone, MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic

solvents to clean the LCD module, use a soft cloth moistened with a
Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases.

Servicing
Firmware Updates
Figure 71. Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap
Firmware Updates The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or
over the Ethernet. This includes both the main processor firmware and the
firmware in all low-level processors. Refer to the iPort manual for the
firmware update procedure.
Accessing the If the Service Menu is not displayed on the Main Menu, use the following
procedure to display it.
Service Mode
1. From the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Service Mode.
The Service Mode screen appears.
2. Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON.
3. Press > to return to the Main Menu.
4. Return to the procedure.
Replacement Parts Table 71 lists the replacement parts for the Model 42i major
subassemblies. Refer to Figure 72 to identify the component location.
List
Table 71. Model 42i Replacement Parts
Part Number Description
100480-00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board
101491-01 Processor Board
100533-00 Motherboard
100539-00 Digital Output Board
100542-00 I/O Expansion Board (Optional)
102340-00 Front Panel Connector Board

Servicing
Replacement Parts List

102496-00 Front Panel Display
101399-00 Transformer, 220-240VAC (Optional)
101863-00 Transformer, 100VAC (Optional)
100536-01 Measurement Interface Board
100856-00 Temperature Control Board (Molybdenum Converter)
100856-01 Temperature Control Board (Stainless Steel Converter)
101167-00 Input Board Assembly
9973 Ozonator Assembly
101419-00 Ozonator Transformer
101023-00 Pressure Transducer
101021-00 Flow Transducer (Sample)
101620-00 Flow Switch (Ozone)
9367 Photomultiplier Tube (PMT)
101024-00 PMT High Voltage Power Supply
101324-00 PMT Base Socket Assembly
101390-00 Solenoid Valve
101020-00 Cooler Assembly
101008-01 Reaction Chamber Assembly
101009-00 NO2-to-NO Converter Assembly (Molybdenum 110VAC)
101214-00 NO2-to-NO Converter Assembly (Stainless Steel 110VAC)
9269 Molybdenum Converter Cartridge
9467 Stainless Steel Converter Cartridge
101011-00 Pump 100VAC w/Plate and Fittings
107751-00 Pump Repair Kit (new technology pump)
9267 Pump Repair Kit
101055-00 AC Receptacle Assembly
101681-00 Power Supply Assembly, 24VDC, w/Base Plate and Screws
100907-00 Fan, 24VDC
8630 Fan Filter
101905-00 Fuse, 250VAC, 4.0 Amp, SlowBlow (for 100VAC and 110VAC models)
101904-00 Fuse, 250VAC, 2.0 Amp, SlowBlow (for 220-240VAC models)
101688-00 Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor
4119 Capillary 0.008-inch ID
4127 Capillary 0.015-inch ID

Servicing
Cable List

6556 Optical Filter Kit (Red Filter, Quartz Window, Rubber Washer)
6998 DriRite
Cable List Table 72 describes the Model 42i spare cables. See the Troubleshooting
chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin
descriptions.
Table 72. Model 42i Cables
101036-00 DC Power Supply 24V Output
101037-00 115VAC Supply to Interface Board
101048-00 RS-485/Data
101038-00 AC Power Switch to Motherboard
101364-00 DC Power Supply Status Monitor
101054-00 Motherboard to Front Panel Board
101035-00 DC Power Supply AC Input
101033-00 AC from Receptacle
101377-00 AC to Power Switch
101267-00 Fan Power Cable
101346-00 Temperature Control
101355-02 Signal Output Ribbon
101695-00 Permeation Oven
101050-00 Heater Power
101055-00 Main AC Receptacle Assembly
102057-00 AC to External Pump
External Device Table 73 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for
connecting external devices such as PCs and data loggers to an iSeries
Connection instrument.
Components Table 73. External Device Connection Components
102562-00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit (DB25) (optional)
102556-00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit (DB37) (optional)
102645-00 Cable, DB37M to Open End Cable, Six Feet (optional)

Servicing
External Device Connection Components

102646-00 Cable, DB37F to Open End, Six Feet (optional)
102659-00 Cable, DB25M to Open End, Six Feet (optional)
6279 Cable, RS-232, Six Feet (optional)
102888-00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly, DB37F (standard)
102891-00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly, DB37M (standard)
103084-00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly, DB25M (included with optional I/O
Expansion Board)
Converter Flow Reaction PMT Assembly

Transducer Chamber
Scrubber Flow
Switch
Capillaries (2)
Pressure Transducer
Input Board
HVPS
Pump
Thermistor
Measurement
Interface Board
I/O Expansion
Board (Opt)
Power Supply
Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board

Transformer Solenoid
Figure 72. Component Layout

Servicing
Removing the The measurement bench can be removed and the partition panel can be
lowered to improve access to connectors and components. Refer to the
Measurement Bench following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel (see
and Lowering the Figure 73).
Partition Panel
SLIDE BENCH OUT
REMOVE SCREWS
Pass Through
Connectors
Remove Screw
Loosen
Captive Partition Panel
Screw
Remove Screws
Remove Screw
LOWER PANEL Remove Hidden Screw
Figure 73. Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition
Panel
Equipment Required:
Philips screwdriver

be worn while handling any internal component.
1. Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord.

Servicing
Pump Replacement
2. If the instrument is mounted in a rack, remove it from the rack.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the plumbing connections at the rear of the measurement

bench.
5. Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the
partition panel.
6. Remove two screws from the left side of the case (viewed from front).
7. Remove one screw from the bottom front of the case.
8. Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel.
9. While holding the case securely, loosen the captive screw at the rear of
the measurement bench, and pull the measurement bench from the rear
of the case.
10. Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel securing the top
of partition panel to the measurement bench, and lower the panel being
careful not to put excessive tension on the cables.
11. Replace the measurement bench by following previous steps in reverse.
Pump Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the pump (see Figure 74).To
rebuild the pump, see Pump Rebuilding in the Preventive Maintenance
chapter.
Equipment Required:
110V pump
Screwdriver

1. Turn instrument OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.

Servicing
Fan/Filter Replacement
2. Disconnect pump power line from AC PUMP connector on the

measurement interface board.
Captive Screws (4)
Figure 74. Replacing the Pump
3. Remove both lines from pump.
4. Loosen the four captive screws on the mounting plate and remove the
pump.
5. Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse.
Fan/Filter Use the following procedure to replace the rear panel fan and the filter
(Figure 75).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
Fan
Fan Filter
Philips screwdriver


Servicing
PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement
1. Turn the instrument OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the
cover.
2. Remove the fan guard and filter from the rear of the instrument by
unsnapping it.
3. If the fan is not being replaced, install the new filter, snap it into place,
and skip the remaining steps.
4. Disconnect the fan power cable from the fan.
5. Remove the four fan mounting screws along with nuts and washers and
remove the fan.
6. Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse order.
Mounting Screws (4)
Filter
Fan Guard
Figure 75. Replacing the Fan
PMT Cooler and Use the following procedure to replace the PMT cooler and reaction
chamber assembly (see Figure 76).
Reaction Chamber
Equipment Required:
Assembly
PMT cooler
Replacement
Wrench, 7/16-inch
Wrench, 9/16-inch

Servicing
PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement
Nut driver, 1/4-inch

Philips screwdriver
Wire cutters

1. Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the

Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel, then
proceed to the next step below.
2. Disconnect the reaction chamber connector from the temperature

control board.
3. Snap off the temperature control board from the board mounts.
4. Remove the four screws securing the cooler shroud to the rear panel
and remove the shroud.
Temperature Control Board
Cooler Shroud
Reaction Chamber
To COOLER on Measurement
Interface Board
To BENCH on
Temp. Control Board
Captive Screws (4)

(Two Not Shown) To PMT HVPS
BNC Connector to Input Board
Figure 76. PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber

Servicing
Photomultiplier Tube Replacement
5. Disconnect plumbing connections from the reaction chamber.
6. Disconnect the cables from the PMT high voltage power supply, the
input board, and the measurement interface board. Remove all tie-
wraps securing the cables.
7. Loosen four captive screws holding cooler to floor plate and remove the
cooler assembly with the reaction chamber.
Note If only the cooler is being replaced, remove the PMT and reaction
chamber from the old cooler and install them on the new cooler.
8. Install new cooler by following previous steps in reverse.
Note Fasten knurled fittings on reaction chamber finger tight.
Make sure that the heat shrink covered tubing between the reaction
chamber and the converter is light tight at the connections.
9. Re-install the measurement bench. Refer to Removing the

Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter.
Photomultiplier Tube Use the following procedure to replace the PMT tube.
Replacement Equipment Required:
Photomultiplier tube and PMT base
Flat blade screwdriver
Philips screwdriver, small

2. Disconnect the high voltage cable from the PMT power supply and
unplug the BNC cable from the Input Board.

Servicing
PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement
3. Remove six external screws holding PMT cover plate and the four
screws holding the PMT shroud to the panel and remove the PMT
cover plate (Figure 77). If the cooler fan is attached, unplug the fan
power cord if necessary.
PMT Cover Plate Screws (6)

PMT Shroud Screws (4)
PMT Base Screws (3)
PMT Base Assembly
Figure 77. Replacing the PMT
4. Remove the three retaining screws holding PMT base assembly to the
cooler using a 5/16-inch nut driver.
Equipment Damage Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light

source. This can permanently damage the tube.
5. Pull the PMT and PMT base from cooler assembly by twisting it
slightly back and forth.
6. To install PMT, follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill

the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to replacing the PMT.
7. Perform a photomultiplier tube calibration. See PMT Voltage

Adjustment in the Operation chapter.
PMT High Voltage Use the following procedure to replace the PMT high voltage power supply
(Figure 78).
Power Supply
Equipment Required:
Replacement
PMT high voltage power supply

Servicing
PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement

Philips screwdriver

2. Disconnect the two PMT high voltage supply cables.
3. Loosen the two retaining screws securing the assembly bracket to the
floor plate and slide the assembly towards the rear slightly and lift it off
the base screws.
4. Loosen two screws on the input box assembly and lift the input box
assembly off the power supply.
5. Remove the four screws securing the power supply to the bracket and
remove the power supply.
Assembly Bracket
HVPS
Input Box Screws (2)
Assembly Bracket Screws (2)

Input Box Assembly
Figure 78. Replacing the PMT HVPS

Servicing
PMT Voltage Adjustment
6. To install the power supply, follow the previous steps in reverse.
7. Recalibrate the instrument. Refer to the calibration procedures in the

Calibration chapter.
PMT Voltage Use the following procedure to adjust the PMT voltage after switching
from standard to extended ranges or vice versa.
Adjustment
1. Select the NO, NO2, and NOx ranges. Refer to Range Menu in the
Operation chapter.
2. Set the NO BKG and NOx BKG calibration factors to 0.0. Refer to
Calibration Factors Menu in the Operation chapter.
3. Set the NO COEF, NOx COEF, and NO2 COEF to 1.000.
4. Set the Averaging Time to 10 seconds. Refer to Averaging Time in

the Operation chapter.
5. Connect the calibration gas and allow the instrument to sample

calibration gas until the reading stabilizes.
6. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Service > press >
to scroll to PMT Voltage Adjustment > and press .
The Set PMT Voltage screen appears.
Note If Service Mode is not displayed, refer to Accessing the Service

Mode on page 7-4, then return to the beginning of this step.
7. At the Set PMT Voltage screen, use to

increment/decrement the counts until the instrument displays the
calibration gas concentration value.

Servicing
Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal
Reaction Chamber Use the following procedure to clean or remove the reaction chamber (see
Figure 79).
Cleaning or Removal
Equipment Required:
Allen Wrench, 9/64-inch
Wrench, 7/16-inch
Wrench, 9/16-inch

1. Remove PMT cooler as described in PMT Cooler and Reaction

Chamber Assembly Replacement in this chapter.
2. Disconnect all plumbing connections from the reaction chamber.
3. Remove the three socket head screws fastening front of reaction

chamber to rear (Figure 79). This exposes the inner surfaces of both
sections of the reaction chamber and the quartz window. To clean these
surfaces use cotton swabs and methanol.
4. To continue removing rear of reaction chamber remove the three

socket head screws holding it to cooler, being careful to keep quartz
window and red filter in cooler body.
5. To reinstall reaction chamber, follow previous steps in reverse, making

sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to installing
reaction chamber.


Servicing
NO2-to-NO Converter Replacement
PMT Cooler
O-Ring (2-034)
Viton Spacer
Reaction Chamber Rear
Red Filter
Quartz Window
O-Ring (2-127)
Reaction Chamber Front
Figure 79. Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber
NO2-to-NO Converter Use the following procedure to replace the converter (Figure 710).
NO2-to-NO Converter
Wrench, 7/16-inch
Wrench, 9/16-inch
Wrench, 1/2-inch
Wrench, 5/8-inch
Screwdriver

Servicing
NO2-to-NO Converter Replacement
CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components. Allow

converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter
components.

2. Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with

heated components.
3. Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet.
4. Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature

control board.
5. Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate.
Top Housing Assembly
Heater Assembly
Moly Converter Assembly
Thermocouple Leads
and Heater Connector
O3 Converter
Bottom Housing Assembly
Captive Screws (4)
Figure 710. NO2-to-NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly

Servicing
Solenoid Valve Replacement
6. Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom
half.
7. Remove the converter cartridge/heater assembly from the bottom

housing assembly.
8. Loosen the heater clamp, pry heater apart no wider than necessary and
remove the converter cartridge noting the proper orientation of heater
wires and thermocouple probe.
9. To replace converter, follow previous steps in reverse. Note Be sure to

wrap the O3 converter tube snugly around the heater.
Solenoid Valve Use the following procedure to replace the solenoid valve (Figure 711).
Solenoid valve
Wrench, 5/16-inch
Philips screwdriver


2. Disconnect solenoid from the Measurement Interface board (NO/NOx

connector). Note electrical connections to facilitate re-connection.
3. Remove plumbing from solenoid. Note plumbing connections to

facilitate re-connection.
4. Pull solenoid valve from mounting clip.
5. To replace solenoid, follow previous steps in reverse.

Servicing
Ozonator Assembly Replacement

Solenoid Valve
Mounting Clip
Figure 711. Replacing the Solenoid Valve
Ozonator Assembly Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator assembly (Figure 7
12).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
Ozonator assembly
Wrench, 5/8-inch
Philips screwdriver



Servicing
Ozonator Assembly Replacement
2. Carefully disconnect the plumbing at the glass inlet and outlet of the
ozonator.
3. Disconnect the stainless steel tubing from the flow transducer.
4. Loosen the four captive screws securing the ozonator bracket to the
floor plate.
Flow Transducer
Captive Screws (4)
Ozonator Assembly Top View
Ozonator Bracket Screws (2)
Ozonator
Ozonator Transformer
Screws (4)
Ozonator Assembly Side View
Figure 712. Replacing the Ozonator Assembly
5. Remove the two screws securing the ozonator to the ozonator bracket.
6. Unplug the ozonator from the ozonator transformer by lifting the

ozonator straight up.
7. To install the ozonator, follow the previous steps in reverse.

Servicing
Ozonator Transformer Replacement

Ozonator Transformer Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator transformer (Figure 7
12).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
Ozonator transformer
Philips screwdriver

2. Remove the ozonator assembly as described in Ozonator Assembly

Replacement.
3. Disconnect the plug connecting the ozonator transformer to the

measurement interface board (OZONATOR connector).
4. Remove the four screws holding the ozonator transformer to the

ozonator bracket and remove the ozonator transformer.
5. To install the ozonator transformer, follow the previous steps in reverse.

Input Board Use the following procedure to replace the input board (Figure 713).
Input board
Philips screwdriver


Servicing
Input Board Replacement

2. Disconnect the coaxial cable with BNC connector and the ribbon
cable.
3. Loosen the two screws holding the assembly bracket to the floor plate,
move the assembly towards the rear, and lift the assembly off the
screws.
4. Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the assembly bracket
and lift the input box off the screws.
Assembly Bracket
Input Board
Input Board Screws (4)

Input Box Screws (2)
Input Box
Assembly Bracket Screws (2)
Figure 713. Replacing the Input Board
5. Remove the four screws holding the input board to the input box and
remove the input board.
6. Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse.

8. Perform an input board calibration. See the Input Board Calibration

procedure that follows.

Servicing
Input Board Calibration
Input Board After replacing the input board, use the following procedure to calibrate the
input board.
Calibration
to scroll to Input Board Calibration > and press .
The Input Board Calibration screen appears.

Mode on page 7-4 , then return to the beginning of this step.
2. At the Input Board Calibration screen, press to select Manual

Input Cal, and press to calibrate.
The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1.
3. Make a note of the FREQ value displayed at GAIN 1, then press

or to change the GAIN to 100.
4. At the GAIN 100 screen, use to increment the D/A counts

until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above (within 50 counts)
the value noted in the previous step.
5. Press to store the value.

The screen flashes Calculating - Please Wait! and Done - Values
Saved! messages.
DC Power Supply Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply (Figure 7
14).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
DC power supply
Philips screwdriver

Servicing
Analog Output Testing

2. Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections. Note connector

locations to facilitate re-connection.
3. Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate
and lift out the power supply.
Power Supply Retaining Screws (4)
BOTTOM VIEW
Captive Screw
Figure 714. Replacing the DC Power Supply
4. Turn the power supply upside down and remove the four retaining
screws securing the power supply to the power supply plate and remove
the power supply.
5. To install the DC power supply, follow the previous steps in reverse.
Analog Output The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front
panel display disagrees with the analog outputs. To check the analog
Testing outputs, you connect a meter to an analog output channel (voltage or
current) and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the
Test Analog Outputs screen.

Servicing
Equipment Required:
Multimeter
Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs.
1. Connect a meter to the channel to be tested. Figure 715 shows the

analog output pins and Table 74 identifies the associated channels.
Current Outputs
Analog Voltage Inputs
Analog Voltage Outputs
Figure 715. Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins
2. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Diagnostics, > press

> to scroll to Test Analog Outputs, and press .
The Test Analog Outputs screen appears.
3. Press to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear

panel terminal pins where the meter is connected, and press .
The Set Analog Outputs screen appears.
4. Press to set the output to zero.

The Output Set To line displays Zero.

Servicing
5. Check that the meter is displaying the zero value. If the meter reading
differs by more than one percent, the analog outputs should be
adjusted. Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that
follows.
6. Press to set the output to full-scale.

The Output Set To line displays Full-Scale.
7. Check that the meter is displaying a full-scale value. If the meter

reading differs by more than one percent, the analog outputs should be
adjusted. Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure b.
8. Press to reset the analog outputs to normal.
Table 74. Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections
Voltage Pin Current Pin
Channel Channel
1 14 1 15
2 33 2 17
3 15 3 19
4 34 4 21
5 17 5 23
6 36 6 25
Ground 16, 18, 19, 35, 37 Current Output Return 13, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24
Table 75. Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections
Input Channel Pin
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 9
8 10
Ground 4, 8, 11, 14

Servicing
Analog Output Calibration
Analog Output Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter
reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than
Calibration one percent or after replacing the optional I/O expansion board.
Equipment Required:
Multimeter
1. Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or

current as appropriate. Figure 715 shows the analog output pins and
Table 74 identifies the associated channels.
to scroll to Analog Output Calibration > and press .
The Analog Output Cal screen appears.

3. At the Analog Output Cal screen, press to scroll to the desired

voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel
terminal pin where the meter is connected, then press .
4. With the cursor at Calibrate Zero, press .

The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero
Note When calibrating the analog output, always calibrate zero first and
then calibrate full-scale.
5. Use until the meter reads 0.0V (or 0.0 or 4.0 mA for a
current channel), then press to save the value.
6. Press to return to the previous screen.
7. Press to select Calibrate Full-Scale.
8. Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set
Output To line, then press to save the value.

Servicing
Analog Input Calibration
Analog Input Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing
the optional I/O expansion board. These procedures include selecting
Calibration analog input channels, calibrating them to zero volts, and then calibrating
them to full-scale using a known voltage source.
Calibrating the Input Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts.
Channels to Zero Volts
1. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Service, press >
to scroll to Analog Input Calibration, and press .
2. The Analog Input Cal screen displays.

Mode on page 7-4, then return to the beginning of this step.
3. At the Analog Input Cal screen, press to scroll to a channel, and

press .
4. With the cursor at Calibrate Zero, press .

The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel.
5. Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and
press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to
zero volts.
The screen displays 0.00 V as the voltage setting.
6. Press > to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and

repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as
necessary.
7. Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full-Scale

procedure that follows.
Calibrating the Input Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by
Channels to Full-Scale applying a known voltage to the channels.

Servicing
Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement
Equipment Required:
DC voltage source (greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts)
1. Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel (1-8) to be

calibrated. Figure 715 shows the analog output pins and Table 75
identifies the associated channels.
2. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Service, press >

to scroll to Analog Input Calibration, and press .
The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1-8.
3. At the Analog Input Cal screen, press to scroll to the channel

selected in Step 1, and press .
4. Press to scroll to Calibrate Full Scale, and press .

The screen displays the current input voltage for the selected channel.
5. Use and to enter the source voltage, and press

to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel to the
source voltage.
6. Press > to return to the input channels display and repeat

Steps 3-5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as
necessary.
Pressure Transducer Use the following procedure to replace the pressure transducer assembly
(Figure 716).
Assembly Replacement
Equipment Required:
Pressure transducer assembly
Philips screwdriver


Servicing
Pressure Transducer Calibration
2. Disconnect plumbing from the pressure transducer assembly. Note the

plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection.
3. Disconnect the pressure transducer cable.
Retaining Screws (2)
Pressure Transducer Assembly
Figure 716. Replacing the Pressure Transducer
4. Remove the two pressure transducer assembly retaining screws and

remove the pressure transducer assembly.
5. To install the pressure transducer assembly, follow previous steps in

reverse.
6. Calibrate the pressure transducer. Refer to the Pressure Transducer

Calibration procedure that follows.
Pressure Transducer Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer.
Calibration Equipment Required:
Vacuum pump


Servicing
Pressure Transducer Calibration

impaired.

Note An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not
introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading.
Therefore, if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump, only
adjust the span setting.
A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the

current barometric pressure from the local weather station or airport and
comparing it to the pressure reading. However, since these pressures are
usually corrected to sea level, it may be necessary to correct the reading to
local pressure by subtracting 0.027 mmHg per foot of altitude.
Do not try to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known
accurately.
2. Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a

vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg.
to scroll to Pressure Calibration > and press .
The Pressure Sensor Cal menu appears.

4. At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu, press to select Zero.

The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears.
5. Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize, then press
to save the zero pressure value.

Servicing
Temperature Control Board Replacement
6. Disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer.
7. Press to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal menu.
8. At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu, press to select Span.

The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears.
9. Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize, use

and to enter the known barometric pressure,
and press to save the pressure value.
10. Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer.
11. Install the cover.
Temperature Control Use the following procedure to replace the temperature control board
(Figure 76).
Board Replacement
Equipment Required:
Temperature control board
Small flat-blade screwdriver

2. Disconnect all connectors from the temperature control board. Use a

small flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the
CONV TC cable. Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the
yellow wire is towards the front.
3. Snap off the board from the board mounts.
4. To install the temperature control board, follow previous steps in

reverse.

Servicing
Ambient Temperature Calibration
Ambient Temperature Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature
for the instrument.
Calibration
Equipment Required:
Calibrated thermometer or 10K 1% Resistor


impaired.

2. Tape the thermistor (plugged into the measurement interface board) to

a calibrated thermometer (Figure 72).
Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0.2 C,

and have a value of 10K ohms at 25 C, an alternate procedure is to
connect an accurately known 10K resistor to the thermistor input (AMB
TEMP) on the measurement interface board, and enter the temperature
reading.
A 1 C change corresponds to a 5% change in resistance, thus this

alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check; however, it clearly is
not NIST traceable.
to scroll to Temperature Calibration > and press .
The Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen appears.


Servicing
Fuse Replacement
4. Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize, use

and to enter the known temperature, and
press to save the temperature value.
Fuse Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the fuse.

Equipment Required:
Replacement fuses:
250VAC, 4 Amp, SlowBlow (for 100VAC and 110VAC models)
250VAC, 2 Amp, SlowBlow (for 220-240VAC models)
1. Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove fuse drawer, located on the AC power connector.
3. If either fuse is blown, replace both fuses.
4. Insert fuse drawer and reconnect power cord.
Scrubber Use the following procedure to replace the ammonia scrubber (Figure 7
17).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
Ammonia scrubber

2. Unscrew the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber.
3. Pull the scrubber off the mounting clips.

Servicing
I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement
4. Push the replacement scrubber into the mounting clips.
5. Attach the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber.
6. Replace the cover.
Silica Scrubber
Mounting Clips
Ammonia Scrubber
Figure 717. Replacing the Scrubber
I/O Expansion Board Use the following procedure to replace the optional I/O expansion board
(Figure 718).
(Optional)
Equipment Required:
Replacement
I/O expansion board

2. Unplug the I/O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD

connector on the motherboard.

Servicing
I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement
3. Remove the two standoffs holding the I/O expansion board connector
to the rear panel (Figure 719).
4. Pop off the board from the mounting studs and remove the board.
5. To install the I/O expansion board, follow previous steps in reverse.
6. Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as

defined earlier in this chapter.
Motherboard Support Bracket
Mounting Studs
Motherboard
Digital Output Board

I/O Expansion Board (Opt)
Figure 718. Replacing the I/O Expansion Board (Optional)
I/O Expansion Board
Motherboard
Figure 719. Rear Panel Board Connectors

Servicing
Digital Output Board Replacement
Digital Output Board Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board (Figure 7
18).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
Digital output board

2. Remove the I/O expansion board (optional), if used. See the I/O
Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement procedure in this chapter.
3. Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the

motherboard.
4. Using the nut driver, remove the two standoffs securing the board to
the rear panel (Figure 719).
5. Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove
the board.
6. To install the digital output board, follow previous steps in reverse.
Motherboard Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard (Figure 7-18).
Motherboard
Philips screwdriver


Servicing
Measurement Interface Board Replacement
2. Remove the I/O expansion board (optional), if used. See the I/O
Expansion Board Replacement procedure in this chapter.
3. Remove the digital output board. See the Digital Output Board
Replacement procedure in this chapter.
4. Unplug all connectors from the motherboard. Note connector locations

to facilitate reconnection.
5. Using the nut driver, remove the eight standoffs securing the board to
the rear panel.
6. Pop off the motherboard from motherboard support bracket, and

remove the motherboard.
7. To install the motherboard, follow previous steps in reverse.
8. Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter

(all ranges).
Measurement Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board
(Figure 720).
Interface Board
Equipment Required:
Replacement
Measurement interface board
Philips screwdriver

1. Lower the partition panel, then proceed to the next step below. Refer to
on page 7-8 in this chapter.
2. Unplug all connectors. Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate

reconnection.

Servicing
Flow Transducer Replacement
3. Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board.
Pop off the measurement interface board from the two bottom
mounting studs and remove the board (Figure 720).
4. To install the measurement interface board, follow previous steps in

reverse.
5. Re-install the measurement bench.
6. Calibrate the PMT voltage, pressure transducer, flow transducer, input

board, and ambient temperature sensor as defined earlier in this
chapter.
Mounting Studs (2)
Mounting Screws (2)
Measurement Interface Board
Figure 720. Replacing the Measurement Interface Board
Flow Transducer Use the following procedure to replace the flow transducer (Figure 721).
Flow transducer


Servicing
Flow Transducer Calibration
2. Disconnect the plumbing connections from the flow transducer. Note

the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection.
Flow Transducer
Retaining Nuts
Figure 721. Replacing the Flow Transducer
3. Disconnect the flow transducer cable from the measurement interface

board.
4. Loosen the two retaining nuts securing the flow transducer to the
ozonator bracket and remove the flow transducer.
5. To install the flow transducer, follow previous steps in reverse.
6. Calibrate the flow transducer. Refer to the Flow Transducer

Flow Transducer Use the following procedure to calibrate the flow transducer.
Calibration Equipment Required:
Calibrated flow sensor


Servicing
Flow Transducer Calibration

impaired.

2. Disconnect the pump cable from AC PUMP connector on the

to scroll to Flow Calibration > and press .
The Flow Sensor Cal menu appears.

4. At the Flow Sensor Cal menu, press to select Zero.

The Calibrate Flow Zero screen appears.
5. Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize, then press
to save the zero flow value.
6. Reconnect the pump cable to the AC PUMP connector on the

7. Connect a calibrated flow sensor at the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear

panel.
8. Press to return to the Flow Sensor Cal menu.
9. At the Flow Sensor Cal menu, press to select Span.

The Calibrate Flow Span screen appears.

Servicing
Front Panel Board Replacement
10. Wait at least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize, use

and to enter the flow sensor reading, and press to
save the value.
Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board (Figure 7
22).
Replacement
Equipment Required:
Front panel board

2. Remove the three ribbon cables and the two-wire connector from the
front panel board.
3. Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the
board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support.
4. Replace the front panel board by following previous steps in reverse.

Servicing
LCD Module Replacement
LCD Module
LCD Module Screws (2)
Retaining Screw
Front Panel Board
Mounting Studs (2)
Ribbon Cables (3)
Two-Wire Connector
Bottom Support
Figure 722. Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module
LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module (Figure 722).
LCD module
Philips screwdriver
CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks, do not to let the liquid crystal contact
your skin or clothes. If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes, wash
it off immediately using soap and water.

Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module.
The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile, handle it carefully.

Servicing
Service Locations
Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth, it may easily
scratch the plate.
Do not use alcohol, acetone, MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic

solvents to clean the LCD module, use a soft cloth moistened with a
Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two-wire connector from the front
panel board.
3. Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module.
4. Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument.
5. Replace the LCD module by following previous steps in reverse.
Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another.
After replacing the LCD screen, the contrast may need to be reset. If the
content on the screen is visible, select Instrument Controls > Screen
Contrast and adjust the screen contrast. If the content on the screen is not
visible, use the set contrast 10 C-Link command to set screen constrast to
mid range, then optimize the contrast. See the C-Link Protocol
Commands appendix for more information on this command.
Service Locations For additional assistance, service is available from exclusive distributors
worldwide. Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support
and technical information or visit us on the web at www.thermo.com/aqi.
1-866-282-0430 Toll Free


Chapter 8
System Description
This chapter describes the function and location of the system components,
provides an overview of the software structure, and includes a description
of the system electronics and input/output connections and functions as
follows:
Hardware on page 8-1
Software on page 8-4
Electronics on page 8-6
I/O Components on page 8-9
Hardware Model 42i hardware components (Figure 81) include:

NO2-to-NO converter
Mode solenoid
Reaction chamber
Optical filter
Pressure transducer
Sample flow sensor
Ozonator
Ozone flow switch
Photomultiplier tube
Photomultiplier tube cooler
Pump
Sample capillary
Dry air capillary

System Description
NO2-to-NO Converter
Converter Flow Reaction PMT Assembly

Transducer Chamber
Scrubber Flow
Switch
Capillaries (2)
Pressure Transducer
Input Board
HVPS
Pump
Thermistor
Measurement
Interface Board
I/O Expansion
Board (Opt)
Power Supply
Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board

Transformer Solenoid
Figure 81. Hardware Components
NO2-to-NO Converter The NO2-to-NO converter heats molybdenum to approximately 325 C in

order to convert and detect NO2. The converter consists of an insulated
housing, heater, replaceable cartridge, and a type K thermocouple sensor.
Mode Solenoid The mode solenoid valve switches analyzer operation between the NO
mode and NOx mode. It routes the ambient air sample either through the
reaction chamber (NO mode) or through the NO2-to-NO converter and
then to the reaction chamber (NOx mode).
Reaction Chamber The reaction chamber is where the sample reacts with ozone and produces
excited NO2 that gives off a photon of energy when it decays.
The reaction chamber is heated and controlled to approximately 50 C in
order to ensure the greatest instrument stability. The sample and ozone
flow capillaries and a thermistor sensor are also housed in/on the reaction
chamber assembly.

System Description
Ozonator
Optical Filter The optical filter housed in the reaction chamber limits the spectral region
viewed by the detector and eliminates possible interferences due to other
chemiluminescent reactions.
Pressure Transducer The pressure transducer measures the reaction chamber pressure.
Sample Flow Sensor The sample flow sensor located at the reaction chamber inlet measures the
sample flow into the reaction chamber.
Ozonator The Ozonator generates the necessary ozone concentration required for the
chemiluminescent reaction. The ozone reacts with the NO in the ambient
air sample to produce the electronically excited NO2 molecules.
Ozonator Flow The ozonator flow switch located at the ozonator inlet completes an
Switch electrical safety circuit when air flows through the sensor to the ozonator. If
airflow stops, the flow sensor breaks the electrical circuit to the ozonator
and shuts it off to prevent the ozonator from overheating.
Photomultiplier Tube The Photomultiplier tube (PMT) provides the infrared sensitivity required
to detect the NO2 luminescence resulting from the reaction of the ozone
with the ambient air sample.
Optical energy from the reaction is converted to an electrical signal by the
PMT and sent to the input board that transmits it to the processor.
Photomultiplier Tube The thermoelectric PMT cooler reduces the PMT temperature to
approximately -3 C to minimize dark current and increase instrument
Cooler sensitivity. The cooler helps to increase zero and span stability over a wide
ambient temperature range. The cooler housing also shields the PMT from
external electrical and optical interferences.
Pump The vacuum pump draws the reacted gasses out of the reaction chamber.
Sample Capillary The sample capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the
sample line.

System Description
Software
Dry Air Capillary The dry air capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the dry
air line.
Software The processor software tasks are organized into four areas:
Instrument Control
Monitoring Signals
Measurement Calculations
Output Communication
Instrument Control Low-level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on
the boards, such as analog and digital I/O and heater control. These
processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high-level
processor that also controls the front-panel user interface. The low-level
processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the
high-level firmware and loaded on power-up if a different version is
detected.
Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware
what functions are supported on that board. This address is also used for
the communications between the low-level processors and the high-level
processor.
Every tenth of a second the frequency counters, analog I/O, and digital I/O
are read and written to by the low-level processor. The counters are
accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over
that second. The high-level processor polls the low-level processors once
per second to exchange the measurement and control data.
Monitoring Signals Signals are gathered from the low-level processors once per second, and
then processed by the high-level processor to produce the final
measurement values. The one-second accumulated counts representing the
NO/NOx are accumulated and reported for the user-specified averaging
time. If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds, the measurement is
reported every 10 seconds. The one-second average of the other analog
inputs are reported directly (no additional signal conditioning is performed
by the high-level processor).
In auto mode, every ten seconds the NO/NOx solenoid switches and the
processor waits three seconds for the reaction chamber to flush and

System Description
Software
stabilize. After those three seconds, it accumulates the signal counts for
seven seconds before again switching the solenoid.
Measurement The calculation of the NO and NOx concentrations is lengthy and uses the
Calculations high-level processor to provide the most accurate readings. The calculation
begins by subtracting the appropriate electronic offset from the seven-
second count accumulation. Following this correction, the raw
accumulated counts are scaled according to the gain setting of the input
board.
Next, the uncorrected NO and NOx values are determined according to a
unique averaging algorithm which minimizes errors resulting from rapidly
changing gas concentrations. This algorithm results in NO and NOx values
which are stored in RAM in a circular buffer that holds all the ten second
data from the previous five minutes. This data is averaged over the selected
time interval, which can be any multiple of ten between 10 and 300 (the
manual modes have additional intervals of 1, 2, and 5 seconds).
The background values for NO and NOx, which are corrected for
temperature, are subtracted from their respective averages. The NO reading
is corrected by the stored span factor and by the temperature factor. The
NOx reading is partially corrected by the span factor, temperature factor,
and balance factor. The corrected NO value is subtracted from the partially
corrected NOx value to yield an uncorrected NO2 value. The NO2 value is
then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NO2 reading.
Finally, the corrected NO2 reading is added to the corrected NO reading to
yield a fully corrected NOx value.
Output Communication The front panel display, serial and Ethernet data ports, and analog outputs
are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations. The
front panel display presents the NO, NO2, and NOx concentrations
simultaneously. The display is updated every 1-10 seconds, depending on
the averaging time.
The analog output ranges are user selectable via software. The analog
outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range. The defaults are
calculated by dividing the data values by the full-scale range for each of the
three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user-selected
output range. Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they
are within -5% of full-scale. The zero and span values may be set by the
user to any desired value.

System Description
Electronics
Electronics All electronics operate from a universal switching supply, which is capable
of auto-sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating
range.
Internal pumps and heaters all operate on 110VAC. An optional
transformer is required if operating on the 210-250VAC or 90-110VAC
ranges.
An on/off switch controls all power to the instrument, and is accessible on
the front panel.
Motherboard The motherboard contains the main processor, power supplies, a sub-
processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument. The
motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel mounted
function key panel and/or over I/O connections on the rear panel and
sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the
instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information. The
motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the front-
panel mounted graphics display and to the rear-panel I/O. The
motherboard also contains I/O circuitry and the associated connector to
monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that
represent the measurement data. Connectors located on the motherboard
include:
External Connectors External connectors include:

External Accessory
RS-232/485 Communications (two connectors)
Ethernet Communications
I/O connector with Power Fail Relay, 16 Digital Inputs, and 6 Analog
Voltage Outputs.
Internal Connectors Internal connectors include:

Function key panel and Display
Measurement Interface Board Data
I/O Expansion Board Data
AC distribution

System Description
Electronics
Measurement The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all
Interface Board measurement electronics in the instrument. It contains power supplies and
interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement
system. It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals
from the motherboard.
Measurement Interface Connectors located on the measurement interface board include:

Board Connectors
Data communication with the motherboard
24V and 120VAC power supply inputs
Fans and solenoid outputs
Cooler control
120VAC outputs for the pump and temperature control board
Ozonator
Flow and pressure sensors
Ambient temperature sensor
Temperature control board
PMT high voltage supply
Measurement input board
Permeation oven option
Flow Sensor The flow sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation
Assembly amplifier and a flow transducer with input and output gas fittings. The
flow transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference
across a precision orifice. This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample
gas in the measurement system.
Pressure Sensor The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing an

Assembly instrumentation amplifier and a pressure transducer with a gas input
fitting. The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the
pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air
pressure.
Temperature Control The temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the
Board reaction chamber and converter.

System Description
Electronics
The reaction chamber temperature is measured with a thermistor. The

voltage across the thermistor is fed to the main processor for use in
calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature. The voltage
across the thermistor is also compared to a set-point voltage and used to
control that the reaction chamber heaters to maintain a constant
temperature of 50 C. Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the
event of broken wires to the thermistor.
The converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple
signal and fed back to the main processor to be used to display and control
the converter temperature. The temperature control board receives control
signals from the main processor software to control the converter heater to
the desired set point. Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event
of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults.
PMT Power Supply The PMT power supply produces high voltage to operate the photo
Assembly multiplier tube used in the measurement system. The output voltage is
adjustable from approximately 600 to 1200 volts under software control.
Input Board The input board accepts the current signal from the PMT and converts it
Assembly to a voltage, which is scaled by a factor of approximately 1, 10, or 100
depending on the full-scale range of the NO channel. The scaled voltage
signal is converted to a frequency and sent to the microprocessor.
The input board includes a test signal that can be activated under software
control. The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in
parallel with the PMT input. This allows the input board and the
connection to the processor system to be tested and calibrated without
using the PMT.
Digital Output Board The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides
solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on
the rear panel of the instrument. Ten relay contacts normally open (with
power off) are provided which are electrically isolated from each other.
Eight solenoid driver outputs (open collector) are provided along with a
corresponding +24VDC supply pin on the connector.
I/O Expansion Board The I/O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the
(Optional) capability to input external analog voltage inputs and to output analog
currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument. It
contains local power supplies, a DC/DC isolator supply, a sub-processor
and analog circuits. Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input

System Description
I/O Components
voltage range of 0V to 10VDC. Six current outputs are provided with a

normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA.
Front Panel Connector The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and
Board the front panel mounted function key panel and Graphics display. It serves
as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key
panel, the graphics display control lines, and the graphics display backlight
to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard. This board
also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a
high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight.
I/O Components External I/O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the
following devices:
Analog output (voltage and current)
Analog input (voltage)
Digital output (TTL levels)
Digital input (TTL levels)
Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I/O support for
future expansion.
Analog Voltage The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs. Each may be software
Outputs configured for any one of the following ranges, while maintaining a
minimum resolution of 12 bits:
0-100mV
0-1V
0-5V
0-10V
The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the
firmware. At least 5% of full-scale over and under range are also supported,
but may be overridden in the firmware, if required.
The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic
channel with a user-defined range in the units of the selected parameter.
The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs.

System Description
I/O Components
Analog Current The optional I/O Expansion board includes six isolated current outputs.
Outputs (Optional) These are software configured for any one of the following ranges, while
maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits:
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through
firmware. At least 5% of full-scale over and under range are also supported,
but may be overridden in the firmware, if required.
The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic
channel with a user-defined range in the units of the selected parameter.
The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs. The current
outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground, but they share
a common return line (Isolated GND).
Analog Voltage Eight analog voltage inputs are used to gather measurement data from
Inputs (Optional) third-party devices. The user may assign a label, unit, and a conversion
table (2 to 10 points). Each point in the conversion table consists of an
analog input voltage value (0-10.5 V) and a corresponding user-defined
reading value. Only two points are necessary for linear inputs, however a
larger number of points may be used to approximate non-linear inputs. All
voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10.5 volts.
Digital Relay The instrument includes one power fail relay on motherboard and ten
Outputs digital output relays on the digital output board. These are reed relays rated
for at least 500 mA @ 200VDC.
The power fail relay is Form C (both normally opened and normally closed
contacts). All other relays are Form A (normally opened contacts) and are
used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer, as
well as remote control to other devices, such as for controlling valves during
calibration. The user may select what information is sent out each relay and
whether the active state is opened or closed.
Digital Inputs Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal
instrument modes and special conditions including:
NO Measure Mode
NOx Measure Mode
Zero Gas Mode

System Description
I/O Components
Span Gas Mode

Set Background
Cal to low span
Cal to high span
Analog outputs to zero
Analog outputs to full-scale
The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration.
The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the
analyzer. The active state can be user defined in firmware.
Serial Ports Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be
linked using one PC serial port.
The standard bi-directional serial interface can be configured for either RS-
232 or RS-485. The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for
standard speeds from 1200 to 19,200 baud. The user can also set the data
bits, parity, and stop bits. The following protocols are supported:
C-Link
Modbus Slave
Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen)
Streaming Data
The Streaming Data protocol transmits user-selected measurement data via
the serial port in real-time for capture by a serial printer, data logger, or PC.
RS-232 Connection A null modem (crossed) cable is required when connecting the analyzer to
an IBM Compatible PC. However, a straight cable (one to one) may be
required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices. As a
general rule, when the connector of the host remote device is female, a
straight cable is required and when the connector is male, a null modem
cable is required.
Data Format:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 BAUD
7 or 8 data bits
1 or 2 stop bit
No, odd, or even parity

System Description
I/O Components
All responses are terminated with a carriage return (hex 0D)

Refer to Table 81 for the DB9 connector pin configuration.
Table 81. RS-232 DB9 Connector Pin Configurations
DB9 Pin Function
2 RX
3 TX
7 RTS
8 CTS
5 Ground
RS-485 Connection The instrument uses a four wire RS-485 configuration with automatic flow
control (SD). Refer to Table 82 for the DB9 connector pin configuration.
Table 82. RS-485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration
DB9 Pin Function
2 + receive
8 - receive
7 + transmit
3 - transmit
5 ground
Ethernet Connection An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting
TCP/IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing. The IP address
may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing (set using a
DHCP server).
Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the
serial port. Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol.
External Accessory The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 42i analyzer.
Connector This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external
devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an
RS-485 electrical interface.

Chapter 9
Optional Equipment
The Model 42i is available with the following options:
Internal Zero/Span and Sample Valves on page 9-1
Internal Permeation Span Source on page 9-2
Ozonator Permeation Dryer on page 9-10
Sample Permeation Dryer on page 9-10
Lag Volume on page 9-10
Ammonia Scrubber on page 9-12
Teflon Particulate Filter on page 9-12
Ozone Particulate Filter on page 9-13
NO2-to-NO Converter on page 9-13
I/O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9-13
Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9-13
Cables on page 9-14
Mounting Options on page 9-15
Internal Zero/Span With the zero/span assembly option, a source of span gas is connected to
the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the ZERO port as
and Sample Valves shown in Figure 91. Zero and span gas should be supplied at atmospheric
pressure. It may be necessary to use an atmospheric dump bypass plumbing
arrangement to accomplish this.
For more information, refer to the Installation chapter and the
Operation chapter.

Optional Equipment
Internal Permeation Span Source
Figure 91. Flow Diagram, Zero/Span Option
Internal Permeation The Internal Permeation Span Source option is designed to provide a
simple source of span gas. It is intended as a quick, convenient check to be
Span Source used between zero and span calibrations for determining instrument
malfunction or drift. Because this option does not precisely control dilution
gas flow, it should not be used as a basis for instrument zero and span
adjustments, calibration updates, or adjustment of ambient data.
Whenever there is an indication of instrument drift or malfunction, a full
zero and multipoint calibration (Level 1) should be performed prior to
corrective action. For further information on zero, span and calibration of
air pollution monitors, refer to Section 2.0.9 of the US EPA's Quality
Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems (Volume II).
Figure 92 shows how this option is integrated with the Model 42i
components. Energizing the sample valve V1 shuts off the sample flow and
permits the flow of zero air for analysis. When valves V1 and V2 are
energized, the flow of zero air mixes with air containing NO2 from the
permeation oven. This mode of operation provides a single point span
check.

Optional Equipment
Figure 92. Flow Diagram, Internal Permeation with Zero/Span Valve
Permeation Tube Use the following procedure to install the optional permeation tube.
Installation
1. Remove the oven cover.
2. Remove the glass chamber assembly by loosening the white plastic

retaining collar, loosening (not removing) the knurled screw, and
gently pulling the assembly upward. Completely remove the oven.
3. Separate the glass chamber from the top assembly by twisting and
gently pulling the glass away from the top.
Note Keep the glass clean when handling it.
4. Place the permeation tube(s) in the glass chamber.
5. Attach the glass chamber to the top assembly by gently pushing the two
together with a slight twisting motion.

Optional Equipment
6. Replace the glass chamber assembly into the oven until the top of the
assembly is flush or slightly below the top of the oven.
Equipment Damage Do not use tools to tighten the knurled screw in the
following step.
7. Tighten the knurled screw finger tight. Do not use tools to tighten.
8. Tighten the white plastic retaining collar.
9. Replace the oven cover being careful to place the tubing and wiring
into the cover slot.
Computation of The computation of NO2 output level is shown in the following

Concentrations information. Note that is assumed that all devices are properly calibrated
and that all flows are corrected to 25 C and 1 atm.
Permeation Tube:
(R) (K)
Output (ppm) =
Qo
Where:
R = permeation rate in ng/min
Q0 = flow rate of gas (scc/min) during span mode
K = constant for the specific permeant = 24.45 / MW
MW = molecular weight
K(NO2) = 0.532
Oven Installation and Use the following procedure to install and configure the permeation oven.
Configuration
1. Physically install the permeation oven and valves into the instrument
and connect the cables and plumbing.
2. From the Perm Oven Settings menu in the Service menu, select Perm
Oven Selection, then select 45 C.

Optional Equipment
3. Remove the thermistor from POJ1 on the measurement interface

board.
4. Connect a resistance of approximately 4.2 K across pins 1 and 2 of

POJ1.
5. Go to the Factory Cal Gas Therm menu from the Perm Oven Settings
menu in the Service menu. Select Low Point, enter the exact value of
the resistor and press to calibrate the low resistance point.
6. Press to return to the Factory Cal Gas Therm menu.
7. Connect a resistance of approximately 5 K across pins 1 and 2 of

POJ1.
8. Go to the High Point screen, enter the exact value of the resistor and
press to calibrate the high resistance point.
9. Press to return to the Factory Cal Gas Therm menu.
10. Remove resistor from POJ1 and re-attach the gas thermistor.
11. Connect a resistance of approximately 4.2 K across pins 3 and 4 of

POJ3.
12. Go to the Factory Cal Oven Therm menu from the Perm Oven
Settings menu in the Service menu. Select Low Point, enter the exact
value of the resistor and press to calibrate the low resistance
point.
13. Press to return to the Factory Cal Oven Therm menu.
14. Connect a resistance of approximately 5 K across pins 3 and 4 of

POJ3.
15. Go to the High Point screen, enter the exact value of the resistor and
press to calibrate the high resistance point.
16. Press to return to the Factory Cal Oven Therm menu.

Optional Equipment
17. Remove resistor from POJ3 and re-attach the permeation oven.
18. Perform a thermistor calibration using the Permeation Tube Oven

Permeation Tube Oven There are two general approaches that can be used to calibrate the
Calibration permeation tube oven. The first is to calibrate the temperature indicator
very accurately (to better than 0.02 C) and to use a permeation tube whose
weight loss has been previously determined at that temperature.
Note An error of approximately 0.1 C corresponds to an error of 1% in

release rate.
The second approach is to note that the thermistors used to measure

temperature are interchangeable to better than 0.2 C. Thus a 1% resistor
of the proper value (4.369 K for 45 C) can be used to set the span on the
measurement interface board. The release rate for the permeation tube is
then determined by weight loss in the actual oven being used.
Setting Perm Oven You can use either of the two calibration methods presented here. One
Temperature method involves performing the Setting Perm Oven Temperature
procedure and then continuing with the Setting Temperature with Water
Bath procedure.
Alternatively, you can perform the Setting Perm Oven Temperature
procedure and then continue with the Setting Temperature with Known
Resistance procedure.
In either case, use the following procedure for setting the perm oven
temperature.
1. Unplug POJ3 from the measurement interface board. Place a 4.369 K

resistor across pins 3 and 4 on the board.
2. In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Cal Oven
Thermistor.

Optional Equipment
CAL OVEN THERM (RESISTOR):

SET TO: 04000 Ohms
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
3. Enter the exact value of the attached resistor and press to save
the offset.
4. Press to return to the Permeation Oven menu.
5. Remove the resistor and re-attach the permeation oven to POJ3.
Setting Temperature with Use the following procedure for setting the measure temperature with water
Water Bath bath.
1. Remove the thermistor from the permeation tube oven, but leave the
thermistor connected to the measurement interface board. Insert the
thermistor into the water bath next to an NIST traceable thermometer
(if necessary, use an extension cable to reach).
2. Turn on the power to the water bath. Using an NIST traceable

thermometer with a resolution of 0.01 C, adjust the water bath to 45
C.
3. In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Cal Gas
Thermistor > Water Bath.
CAL GAS THERM (BATH):

o
CURRENTLY: 45.80 C
o
SET TO: 45.00 C
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
4. Enter the thermistor temperature from the thermometer and press

.

Optional Equipment
5. Remove the thermistor from the water bath, dry, and replace into the
permeation tube oven.
6. Make sure the source of zero air is connected to the ZERO bulkhead
on the rear panel.
7. Wait for the permeation gas temperature reading to stabilize.
Setting Temperature with Use the following procedure to set the gas temperature with an accurate
Known Resistance known resistance.
1. Remove the thermistor from POJ1 on the measurement interface

board.
2. Connect a 4.369 K resistor across pins 1 and 2 of POJ1 (use a

resistance substitution box and an accurate meter, if necessary).
3. In the Main Menu, choose Service > Perm Oven Settings > Cal Gas
Thermistor > Known Resistor.
CAL GAS THERM (RESISTOR):

SET TO: 04000 Ohms
MOVE CURSOR
CHANGE VALUE SAVE
4. Enter the exact value of the attached resistor and press to save
the offset.
5. Remove the resistor and reconnect the gas thermistor.
6. Make sure the source of zero air is connected to the ZERO bulkhead
on the rear panel.
7. Wait for the permeation gas temperature reading to stabilize.

Optional Equipment
Determining Permeation Use the following procedure to determine the permeation rate by weight
Rate by Weight Loss loss.
1. Make sure the oven has been calibrated as described in the Permeation
Tube Oven Calibration procedure described previously.
2. Insert the permeation tube carefully. Do not touch with fingers.
3. Turn on the instrument.
4. Wait 24-48 hours for the permeation tube to stabilize.
5. Carefully remove the permeation tube from the oven and weigh to an
accuracy of 0.1mg. Perform this measurement as quickly as possible.
6. Replace the permeation tube into the oven of the instrument.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 after two weeks.
8. Compute the weight loss of the permeation tube from the values
determined in Steps 5 through 7.
9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until the weight loss has been determined to a
precision of 1-2%.
10. For the most accurate work, use the permeation tube in the same oven
that was used to determine the weight loss of permeation tube.
Determining Release Rate Use the following procedure to determine the release rate by transfer
by Transfer Standard standard.
1. Make sure the oven has been calibrated as described in the Permeation
Tube Oven Calibration procedure described previously. Also make
sure that the Transfer Standard has been properly calibrated.
2. Determine the permeation rate for the permeation tube in the Transfer
Standard, or install a certified permeation tube.

Optional Equipment
Ozonator Permeation Dryer
3. Allow the permeation tubes in both the 42i and the Transfer Standard
to stabilize for at least 24-48 hours.
4. Carefully calibrate the 42i using the Transfer Standard. The output of
the Transfer Standard should be connected to the SAMPLE bulkhead
on the rear panel of the 42i.
5. Switch the calibrated 42i into the span mode.
6. Measure the flow rate into the ZERO bulkhead on the rear panel of the
42i. Be sure that the source of zero air is connected. Note the flow and
measured NO2 concentration.
7. From the flow and measured concentration, compute the permeation

tube release rate.
Ozonator Permeation The permeation dryer minimizes routing maintenance procedures by

providing a continuous stream of dry air to the ozonator (using the
Dryer selective water permeation characteristics of the dryer). With the
permeation dryer option, it is not necessary to constantly replenish the
ozonator air-drying column as in the standard instrument.
Sample Permeation The sample permeation dryer option is used when there may be widely
varying levels of ambient water vapor present. The dryer stabilizes the
Dryer moisture content of the sample stream providing a constant dew-point at
the outlet over a wide range of inlet ambient moisture levels.
A secondary benefit of the sample dryer option is its ability to remove
ambient levels of ammonia (NH3) from the sample stream.
Lag Volume The Model 42i is available with the following Lag Volume option.
Principle of Operation The Model 42i is based on the principle that nitric oxide (NO) and ozone
react to produce a characteristic luminescence with an intensity linearly
proportional to the NO concentration. Infrared light emission results when
electronically excited NO2 molecules decay to lower energy states.

Optional Equipment
Lag Volume
Specifically,
NO O 3 NO 2 O 2 h
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) must first be transformed into NO before it can

be measured using the chemiluminescent reaction. NO2 is converted to
NO by a molybdenum NO2-to-NO converter heated to about 325 C.
3 NO 2 Mo 3 NO MoO3
The ambient air sample enters the Model 42i through an inline Teflon
particulate filter, through a flow control capillary, and then splits between
the NO and the NOx channel. In the NO channel, the spilt sample is
directed to the common port of the three-way solenoid valve. The sample is
then routed either to the inlet tee of the reaction chamber or joins the
exhaust of the reaction chamber. In the NOx channel, the split sample is
directed to the common port of a second three-way solenoid valve after
having passed through the NO2 converter and a lag volume, as shown in
Figure 93. The "delayed" sample is then routed identically to the NO
channel.
The two channels operate 180 out of phase, that is, when the instrument is
monitoring NO, the NOx sample is being bypassed, and when the
instrument is monitoring NOx, the NO sample is being bypassed. The
solenoids switch every 5 seconds and the size of the lag volume has been
chosen so the same original sample is being monitored by both the NO and
the NOx channels. In this way, any positive or negative errors in the NO2
signal (determined by the difference between the NOx and NO readings) is
minimized - especially in a situation where the sample is changing rapidly,
e.g., an urban traffic environment.
The Model 42i stores the NO signal obtained during the first half of the
solenoid cycle, determines the NOx signal during the second half of the
solenoid cycle, and then calculates and updates a NO, NO2, and NOx
signal every 10 seconds. Averages are available then from 10 to 300
seconds.

Optional Equipment
Ammonia Scrubber
Figure 93. Flow Diagram, Lag Volume
Lag Volume Test Use the following procedure to test the Model 42i with lag volume option.
1. Set the NO range to 1,000 ppb and the averaging time to 10 seconds.
2. Introduce approximately 800 ppb NO into the Model 42i. Wait for a
stable reading and then record the NO2 reading. Next, introduce zero
air into the Model 42i. Wait until the instrument reads close to zero
(<3 ppb). Repeat the above procedure two more times. Take the
average of the three NO2 readings. The average NO2 reading should be
less than 50 ppb.
Ammonia Scrubber The ammonia scrubber is mounted internally and removes ammonia from
the sample air.
Teflon Particulate A 5-10 micron pore size, two-inch diameter Teflon element is available for
the Model 42i. This filter should be installed just prior to the SAMPLE
Filter bulkhead. When using a filter, all calibrations and span checks must be
performed through the filter.

Optional Equipment
Ozone Particulate Filter
Ozone Particulate The ozone particulate filter minimizes the potential for contamination of
the capillary and reaction chamber by trapping any particulate matter
Filter before passing through the capillary and reaction chamber.
NO2-to-NO Converter The Model 42i includes a Molybdenum NO2-to-NO converter as standard
equipment. A stainless steel converter is available as an option.
I/O Expansion Board The I/O expansion board provides six analog current output channels (0-
20 mA or 4-20 mA) and eight analog voltage inputs (0-10V). The DB25
Assembly connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and
outputs.
25 Pin Terminal The 25-pin terminal board assembly is included with the I/O expansion
board. Refer Terminal Board PCB Assemblies in the Installation
Board Assembly chapter for information on attaching the cable to the connector board. For
associated part numbers, refer to External Device Connection
Components on page 7-6.
Terminal Block and The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to
connect devices to the instrument. These kits break out the signals on the
Cable Kits rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals.
Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available. One kit is for the
DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector
or the relay output connector. The other kit is for the DB25 connector and
can be used for the optional I/O expansion board. For associated part
numbers, refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7-6.
Each kit consists of:
one six-foot cable
one terminal block
one snap track
Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I/O
expansion board requires:
two DB37 kits
one DB25 kit

Optional Equipment
Cables
Cables Table 91 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the
instrument and Table 92 provides the cable color codes. For associated
part numbers, refer to External Device Connection Components on page
7-6.
Note Table 92 provides the color coding for both 25-pin cables and 37-
pin cables. Color codes for pins 1-25 are for 25-pin cables; color codes for
pins 1-37 are for 37-pin cables.
Table 91. Cable Options

Description Cable Length
DB37M to open end Six feet
DB37F to open end Six feet
DB25M to open end Six feet
RS-232 Six feet
Table 92. Color Codes for 25-Pin and 37-Pin Cables

Pin Color Pin Color
1 BLACK 20 RED/BLACK
2 BROWN 21 ORANGE/BLACK
3 RED 22 YELLOW/BLACK
4 ORANGE 23 GREEN/BLACK
5 YELLOW 24 GRAY/BLACK
6 GREEN 25 PINK/BLACK
7 BLUE End color codes for 25-pin cables
continue for 37-pin cables.
8 VIOLET 26 PINK/GREEN
9 GRAY 27 PINK/RED
19 WHITE 28 PINK/VIOLET
11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE
12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE/BROWN
13 BLACK/WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE/RED
14 BROWN/WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE/VIOLET
15 RED/WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE/BLACK

Optional Equipment
Mounting Options
Pin Color Pin Color

16 ORANGE/WHITE 34 GRAY/GREEN
17 GREEN/WHITE 35 GRAY/RED
18 BLUE/WHITE 36 GRAY/VIOLET
19 VIOLET/WHITE 37 LIGHT GREEN/BLACK
Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 93
and shown in Figure 91 through Figure 94.
Table 93. Mounting Options
Mounting Type Description
Bench Positioned on bench, includes mounting feet and front panel side-
trim handles.
EIA rack Mounted in an EIA-style rack, includes mounting slides and front
panel EIA-rack mounting handles.
Retrofit rack Mounted in an EIA-style rack, includes mounting slides and front
panel EIA-rack mounting handles. This configuration is intended
for direct replacement of a C-series instrument in an existing
rack. The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the
front mounting screw slots are in non-standard EIA locations.

Optional Equipment
Mounting Options
Figure 91. Bench Mounting

Optional Equipment
Mounting Options
Figure 92. EIA Rack Mounting

Optional Equipment
Mounting Options
Figure 93. Retrofit Rack Mounting

Optional Equipment
Mounting Options
Figure 94. Rack Mount Option Assembly

Appendix A
Warranty
Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in
Warranty conformance with Seller's published specifications and be free from defects
in material and workmanship, when subjected to normal, proper and
intended usage by properly trained personnel, for the period of time set
forth in the product documentation, published specifications or package
inserts. If a period of time is not specified in Sellers product
documentation, published specifications or package inserts, the warranty
period shall be one (1) year from the date of shipment to Buyer for
equipment and ninety (90) days for all other products (the "Warranty
Period"). Seller agrees during the Warranty Period, to repair or replace, at
Seller's option, defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in
substantial conformance with said published specifications; provided that
(a) Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any
defect, which notice shall include the product model and serial number (if
applicable) and details of the warranty claim; (b) after Sellers review, Seller
will provide Buyer with service data and/or a Return Material
Authorization (RMA), which may include biohazard decontamination
procedures and other product-specific handling instructions; and (c) then,
if applicable, Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all
costs prepaid by Buyer. Replacement parts may be new or refurbished, at
the election of Seller. All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller.
Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in
accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Sellers Terms and
Conditions of Sale. Consumables, including but not limited to lamps,
fuses, batteries, bulbs and other such expendable items, are expressly
excluded from the warranty under this warranty.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Products supplied by Seller that are
obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are
not warranted by Seller, but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty
rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer
or third party supplier, to the extent such assignment is allowed by such
original manufacturer or third party supplier.
In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs, replacements
or corrections required, in whole or in part, as the result of (i) normal wear
and tear, (ii) accident, disaster or event of force majeure, (iii) misuse, fault
or negligence of or by Buyer, (iv) use of the Products in a manner for which
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual A-1

Warranty
Warranty
they were not designed, (v) causes external to the Products such as, but not
limited to, power failure or electrical power surges, (vi) improper storage
and handling of the Products or (vii) use of the Products in combination
with equipment or software not supplied by Seller. If Seller determines
that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not
covered by the warranty hereunder, Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for
all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller's then
prevailing time and materials rates. If Seller provides repair services or
replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this
warranty, Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller's then prevailing time and
materials rates. ANY INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, REPAIR,
SERVICE, RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF, OR
OTHER TAMPERING WITH, THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY
ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT
SELLER'S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL, OR ANY USE OF
REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER, SHALL
IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH
RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS.
THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT
SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A
DEFECTIVE PRODUCT. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN
THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT
THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR-FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH
ANY PARTICULAR RESULT.
A-2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Appendix B
C-Link Protocol Commands
This appendix provides a description of the C-Link protocol commands
that can be used to remotely control a Model 42i analyzer using a host
device such as a PC or a datalogger. C-Link protocol may be used over RS-
232, RS-485, or Ethernet. C-Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet
using TCP/IP port 9880.
Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user-
defined periodic basis. Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when
a connection is made on TCP port 9881.
Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over
Ethernet.
For details, see the following topics:
Instrument Identification Number on page B-1
Commands on page B-2
Measurements on page B-10
Alarms on page B-14
Diagnostics on page B-18
Datalogging on page B-19
Calibration on page B-27
Keys/Display on page B-30
Measurement Configuration on page B-35
Hardware Configuration on page B-39
Communications Configuration on page B-43
I/O Configuration on page B-49
Record Layout Definition on page B-55
Instrument Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) symbol or
Identification byte value equivalent of the instrument's identification number plus 128.
Number
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual B-1
Commands
For example, if the instrument ID is set to 25, then each command must
begin with the ACSII character code 153 decimal. The analyzer ignores any
command that does not begin with its instrument identification number. If
the instrument ID is set to 0, then this byte is not required. For more
information on changing Instrument ID, see Chapter 3, Operation.
Commands The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument
parameters via remote. However, the command set mode remote can be
sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode. Report commands
(commands that dont begin with set) can be issued either in the remote
or local mode. For information on changing modes, see Chapter 3,
Operation.
The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercase characters.
Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification
number (ASCII) character. The command in the example below begins
with the ASCII character code 170 decimal, which directs the command to
the Model 42i, and is terminated by a carriage return CR (ASCII
character code 13 decimal).
<ASCII 170> T I M E <CR>
Many of the commands have two forms. One form reads parameter from
the instruments memory, and the other writes, or updates, a parameter.
The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the
command and provides an argument. Command responses are generally
echoed with a data element appended.
Note If the Service Mode is active, C-Link set commands are not
allowed. This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while
the unit is being serviced locally.
If an incorrect command is sent, an error message is generated. The list of

error responses is shown in Table B1. The following example sends the
incorrect command set unit ppm instead of the correct command set gas
unit ppm.
Send: set unit ppm
Receive: set unit ppm bad cmd
B-2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Commands
Table B1. Error Response Messages

Command Response Description
bad cmd Command is not recognized
too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit
too low Supplied value is lower than the lower limit
invalid string Supplied string invalid (typically because a letter was detected
when the value should be numeric)
data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command
cant, wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode
cant, mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode
The save and set save params commands (duplicated for backward
compatibility) store parameters in FLASH memory. It is important that
this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed. If
changes are not saved, they will be lost in the event of a power failure.
Convert Concentration Convert concentration formats from xxxxE+yy to x.xxxE+yy. The iSeries
Formats uses more standard script than the C-Series by placing only one digit to the
left of the decimal.
Commands List Table B1 lists the 42i C-Link protocol commands. The interface will
respond to the command strings outlined below.
Table B1. C-Link Protocol Commands
Command Description Page
1 Simulates pressing soft key 1 pushbutton B-33
addr dns Reports/sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B-43
addr gw Reports/sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B-43
addr ip Reports/sets IP address for Ethernet port B-43
addr nm Reports/sets netmask address for Ethernet port B-44
addr ntp Reports the IP address for network time protocol server B-44
alarm chamber Reports/sets chamber temperature alarm maximum value B-14
temp max

Commands

alarm chamber Reports/sets chamber temperature alarm minimum value B-14
temp min
alarm conc no max Reports/sets current NO concentration alarm maximum value B-15
alarm conc no min Reports/sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B-15
alarm conc no2 max Reports/sets current NO2 concentration alarm maximum B-15
value
alarm conc no2 min Reports/sets current NO2 concentration alarm minimum value B-15
alarm conc nox max Reports/sets current NOx concentration alarm maximum B-15
value
alarm conc nox min Reports/sets current NOx concentration alarm minimum value B-15
alarm converter Reports/sets NO2 converter temperature alarm maximum B-15
temp max value
alarm converter Reports/sets NO2 converter temperature alarm minimum B-15
temp min value
alarm cooler temp Reports/sets PMT cooler temperature alarm maximum value B-16
max
alarm cooler temp Reports/sets PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value B-16
min
alarm internal temp Reports/sets internal temperature alarm maximum value B-16
max
alarm internal temp Reports/sets internal temperature alarm minimum value B-16
min
alarm pressure max Reports/sets pressure alarm maximum value B-16
alarm pressure min Reports/sets pressure alarm minimum value B-16
alarm sample flow Reports/sets sample flow alarm maximum value B-17
max
alarm sample flow Reports/sets sample flow alarm minimum value B-17
min
alarm trig conc no Reports/sets current NO concentration alarm trigger sense B-17
alarm trig conc no2 Reports/sets current NO2 concentration alarm trigger sense B-17
alarm trig conc nox Reports/sets current NOx concentration alarm trigger sense B-17
allow mode cmd Reports/sets the current set allow mode command B-47
analog iout range Reports/sets analog current output range per channel B-49
analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B-50
analog vout range Reports/sets analog voltage output range per channel B-50
avg time Reports/sets averaging time B-10
baud Reports/sets current baud rate B-44

Commands

bkg no Reports/sets current NO background B-29
bkg nox Reports/sets current NOx background B-29
cal high no coef Sets/auto-calibrates high range NO coefficient B-27
cal high no2 coef Sets/auto-calibrates high range NO2 coefficient B-27
cal high nox coef Sets/auto-calibrates high range NOx coefficient B-27
cal low no coef Sets/auto-calibrates low range NO coefficient B-27
cal low no2 coef Sets/auto-calibrates low range NO2 coefficient B-27
cal low nox coef Sets/auto-calibrates low range NOx coefficient B-27
cal no bkg Sets/auto-calibrates NO background B-27
cal no coef Sets/auto-calibrates NO coefficient B-27
cal no2 coef Sets/auto-calibrates NO2 coefficient B-27
cal nox bkg Sets/auto-calibrates NOx background B-27
cal nox coef Sets/auto-calibrates NOx coefficient B-27
cal perm gas offset Sets/calibrates permeation gas temperature sensor offset B-29
res using a calibrating resistor in ohms
cal perm gas offset Sets/calibrates permeation gas temperature sensor offset to B-29
temp a temperature of degrees C
cal perm oven offset Sets/calibrates permeation oven temperature sensor offset B-30
res using a calibrating resistor in ohms
clr lrecs Clears away only long records that have been saved B-19
clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B-19
clr srecs Clears away only short records that have been saved B-19
contrast Reports/sets current screen contrast B-39
conv set temp Reports/sets temperature setpoint for NO2 converter B-40
conv temp Reports current NO2 converter temperature B-12
cooler temp Reports temperature of PMT cooler (same as PMT B-12
temperature)
copy lrec to sp Sets/copies current lrec selection into the scratch pad B-25
copy sp to lrec Sets/copies current selections in scratch pad into lrec list B-25
copy sp to srec Sets/copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B-25
copy sp to stream Sets/copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B-25
copy srec to sp Sets/copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B-25
copy stream to sp Sets/copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B-25
pad
custom Reports/sets defined custom range concentration B-36

Commands

data treatment lrec Reports/sets data treatment for concentrations values in long B-19
records
data treatment srec Reports/sets data treatment for concentrations values in B-19
short records
date Reports/sets current date B-40
default params Sets parameters to default values B-41
dhcp Reports/sets state of use of DHCP B-45
diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage level for I/O expansion board B-18
diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard B-18
diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface B-18
board
dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B-51
din Reports/sets digital input channel and active state B-51
do (down) Simulates pressing down pushbutton B-33
dout Reports/sets digital output channel and active state B-51
dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B-52
channel
en (enter) Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B-33
er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B-20
in the format specified in the commands
erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B-21
(measurements and status) in the specified format
erec format Reports/sets erec format (ASCII or binary) B-22
erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B-23
flags Reports 8 hexadecimal digits (or flags) that represent the B-13
status of the ozonator, PMT, gas mode, and alarms
flow Reports current measured sample flow in LPM B-12
format Reports/sets current reply termination format B-45
gas mode Reports current mode of sample, zero, or span B-37
gas unit Reports/sets current gas units B-38
he (help) Simulates pressing help pushbutton B-33
high avg time Reports/sets high range averaging time B-10
high no Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B-11
coefficients
high no coef Reports/sets high range NO coefficients B-27
high no gas Reports/sets high range NO span gas concentration B-28

Commands

high no2 Reports NO2 concentration calculated with high range B-11
coefficients
high no2 coef Reports/sets high range NO2 coefficients B-27
high no2 gas Reports/sets high range NO2 span gas concentration B-28
high nox Reports NOx concentration calculated with high range B-11
coefficients
high nox coef Reports/sets high range NOx coefficients B-27
high nox gas Reports/sets high range NOx span gas concentration B-28
high range no Reports/selects current NO high range B-35
high range no2 Reports/selects current NO2 high range B-35
high range nox Reports/selects current NOx high range B-35
host name Reports/sets host name string B-46
instr name Reports instrument name B-46
instrument id Reports/sets instrument id B-46
internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature B-12
isc (iscreen) Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B-33
layout ack Disables stale layout/layout changed indicator (*) B-48
le (left) Simulates pressing left pushbutton B-33
list din Lists current selection for digital input B-19
list dout Lists current selection for digital output B-19
list lrec Lists current selection lrec logging data B-20
list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B-20
list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B-20
list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B-20
list var aout Reports list of analog output, index numbers, and variables B-53
list var din Reports list of digital input, index numbers, and variables B-53
list var dout Reports list of digital output, index numbers, and variables B-53
low avg time Reports/sets low averaging time B-10
low no Reports NO concentration calculated with low range B-11
coefficients
low no coef Reports/sets low range NO coefficient B-27
low no gas Reports/sets low range NO span gas concentration B-28
low no2 Reports NO2 concentration calculated with low range B-11
coefficients
low no2 coef Reports/sets low range NO2 coefficient B-27

Commands

low no2 gas Reports/sets low range NO2 span gas concentration B-28
low nox Reports NOx concentration calculated with low range B-11
coefficients
low nox coef Reports/sets low range NOx coefficient B-27
low nox gas Reports/sets low range NOx span gas concentration B-28
low range no Reports/sets current NO low range B-35
low range no2 Reports/sets current NO2 low range B-35
low range nox Reports/sets current NOx low range B-35
lr Outputs long records in the format specified in the command B-20
lrec Outputs long records B-21
lrec format Reports/sets output format for long records (ASCII or binary) B-22
lrec layout Reports current layout of lrec data B-23
lrec mem size Reports maximum number of long records that can be stored B-23
lrec per Reports/sets long record logging period B-24
malloc lrec Reports/sets memory allocation for long records B-24
malloc srec Reports/sets memory allocation for short records B-24
mb read coils Reports the current state of the MODBUS coils (digital B-53
outputs)
mb read registers Reports the current state of the MODBUS registers (analog B-53
outputs)
mb write coil Sets the current state of MODBUS coil (digital input) B-54
me (menu) Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B-33
meas mode Reports/sets which measurement mode is active B-38
menutext Displays the text of the menu item where the cursor is B-34
currently positioned
mode Reports operating mode in local, service, or remote B-47
no Reports current NO concentration B-11
no bkg Reports/sets current NO background B-29
no coef Reports/sets current NO coefficient B-27
no gas Reports/sets NO span gas concentration B-28
no of lrec Reports/sets number of long records stored in memory B-24
no of srec Reports/sets number of short records stored in memory B-24
no2 Reports current NO2 concentration B-11
no2 coef Reports/sets current NO2 coefficient B-27
no2 gas Reports/sets NO2 span gas concentration B-28

Commands

nox Reports current NOx concentration B-11
nox bkg Reports/sets current NOx background B-29
nox coef Reports/sets current NOx coefficient B-27
nox gas Reports/sets NOx span gas concentration B-28
ozonator Reports/sets ozonator on or off B-41
ozonator flow Reports current ozonator flow B-41
ozonator safety Reports/sets ozonator safety on or off B-41
ozonator status Reports status of ozonator and safety B-41
perm gas temp Reports current permeation gas temperature B-12
pmt status Reports/sets PMT status on or off B-42
pmt temp Reports temperature of the PMT cooler (same as cooler B-13
temperature)
pmt voltage Reports current PMT voltage B-13
power up mode Reports/sets the power up mode as local or remote B-48
pres Reports current reaction chamber pressure B-13
pres comp Reports/sets pressure compensation on or off B-38
program no Reports analyzer program number B-48
push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B-33
range mode Reports/sets current range mode B-37
range no Reports/sets current NO range B-35
range no2 Reports/sets current NO2 range B-35
range nox Reports/sets current NOx range B-35
react temp Reports current reaction chamber temperature B-13
relay stat Reports/sets relay logic status to for the designated relay(s) B-54
ri (right) Simulates pressing right pushbutton B-33
ru (run) Simulates pressing run pushbutton B-33
sample Sets zero/span valves to sample mode B-37
sample flow Reports current measured sample flow in LPM B-12
sample gas Sets zero/span valves to sample gas mode B-37
save Stores parameters in FLASH B-42
save params Stores parameters in FLASH B-42
sc (screen) C-series legacy command that reports a generic response B-34
(Use iscreen instead)
sp field Reports/sets item number and name in scratch pad list B-25

Measurements

span Sets zero/span valves to span mode B-37
span cal reset Reports/sets span cal reset on/off B-30
span dev Reports/sets span deviation (maximum span check offset) B-30
span dur Reports/sets how long span gas is sampled by the instrument B-30
span gas Sets zero/span valves to span gas mode B-37
sr Reports last short record stored B-20
srec Reports maximum number of short records B-21
srec format Reports/sets output format for short records (ASCII or binary) B-22
srec layout Reports current layout of short record data B-23
srec mem size Reports maximum number of short records B-23
srec per Reports/sets short record logging period B-24
stream per Reports/sets current set time interval for streaming data B-26
stream time Reports/sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B-26
temp comp Reports/sets temperature compensation on or off B-39
time Reports/sets current time (24-hour time) B-42
tz Reports/sets the timezone string for the network time B-49
protocol server
up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B-33
version Reports version of all the firmware components B-18
zero Sets zero/span valves to zero mode B-37
zero cal reset Reports/sets zero cal reset on/off B-30
zero dev Reports/sets zero deviation (maximum zero check offset) B-30
zero dur Reports/sets how long zero gas is ampled by the instrument B-30
zero gas Sets zero/span valves to zero gas mode B-37
zs avg time Reports/sets zero/span averaging time B-31
zs period Reports/sets zero/span period B-31
Measurements avg time

high avg time
low avg time
These commands report the averaging time in seconds when operating in
single range, or averaging time used with the high and low ranges when
operating in dual or auto range mode. The example below shows that the
averaging time is 300 seconds, according to Table B2.

Measurements
Send: avg time

Receive: avg time 11:300 sec
set avg time selection

set high avg time selection
set low avg time selection
These commands set the averaging time, high and low averaging times,
according to Table B2. The example below sets the low range averaging
time to 120 seconds.
Send: set low avg time 8

Receive: set low avg time 8 ok
Table B2. Averaging Times

Selection Time, NO Measure Mode, Time, NO/NOx Measure
NOx Measure Mode Mode
0 1 seconds
1 2
2 5
3 10 10 seconds
4 20 20
5 30 30
6 60 60
7 90 90
8 120 120
9 180 180
10 240 240
11 300 300
no
no2
nox
high no
high no2
high nox
low no
low no2
low nox
These commands report the measured NO, NO2, and NOx concentrations
when operating in single range, or high and low NO, NO2, and NOx when

Measurements
operating in dual or auto range mode. The example below shows that the
NO concentration is 67.2 ppb.
Send: no
Receive: no 6.720E+01 ppb
conv temp
This command reports the current NO2 converter temperature. The
example below reports that the current converter temperature is 320.7 C.
Send: conv temp

Receive: conv temp 320.7 deg C
cooler temp
This command reports the current PMT cooler temperature. The example
below reports that the current PMT cooler temperature is -2.8 C.
Send: pmt temp

Receive: pmt temp -2.8 deg C
flow
sample flow
These commands report the current measured flow. The example below
reports that the flow measurement is 0.700 liters/minute.
Send: flow
Receive: flow 0.7 1/m
internal temp
This command reports the current internal instrument temperature. The
first reading is the temperature being used in instrument calculations. The
second temperature is the actual temperature being measured. If
temperature compensation is on, then both temperature readings are the
same. If temperature compensation is off, a temperature of 30 C is used as
the default temperature even though the actual internal temperature is 27.2
C. The example below shows that temperature compensation is on and
that the internal temperature is 27.2 C.
Send: internal temp

Receive: internal temp 027.2 deg C, actual 027.2
perm gas temp

This command reports the current permeation gas temperature. The
example below reports that the permeation gas temperature is 45 C.
Send: perm gas temp

Receive: perm gas temp 45 deg C

Measurements
pmt temp
This command reports the PMT cooler temperature. The example below
reports that the PMT cooler temperature is -2.8 C.
Send: pmt temp

Receive: pmt temp -2.8 deg C
pmt voltage
This command reports the PMT voltage. The example below reports that
the current PMT voltage is -750 volts.
Send: pmt voltage

Receive: pmt voltage -750
pres
This command reports the current reaction chamber pressure. The first
pressure reading is the pressure reading being used in instrument
calculations. The second pressure is the actual pressure reading being
measured. If pressure compensation is on, then both pressure readings are
the same. If pressure compensation is off, a pressure of 300 mmHg is used
as default pressure even though the actual pressure is 306.3 mmHg. The
example below shows that the actual reaction chamber pressure is 306.3
mmHg.
Send: pres
Receive: pres 753.4 mm Hg, actual 306.6
react temp
This command reports the current reaction chamber temperature. The
example below reports that the current reaction temperature is 49.0 C.
Send: react temp

Receive: react temp 49.0 deg C
flags
This reports 8 hexadecimal digits (or flags) that represent the status of the
ozonator, PMT, pressure and temperature compensation status, gas units,
gas mode, and alarms. To decode the flags, each hexadecimal digit is
converted to binary as shown in the Figure B1. It is the binary digits that
define the status of each parameter. In the example below, the instrument is
reporting that the ozonator and PMT are both on, and that the instrument
is in the span gas mode.
Send: flags
Receive: flags 80028000

Alarms
Figure B1. Flags
Alarms alarm chamber temp min

alarm chamber temp max
These commands report the chamber temperature alarm minimum and
maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the
chamber temperature alarm minimum value is 47.0 C.
Send: alarm chamber temp min

Receive: alarm chamber temp min 47.0 deg C
set alarm chamber temp min value

set alarm chamber temp max value
These commands set the chamber temperature alarm minimum and
maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number
representing chamber temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example
below sets the chamber temperature alarm maximum value to 50.0 C.
Send: set alarm chamber temp max 50.0

Receive: set alarm chamber temp max 50.0 ok

Alarms
alarm conc no min

alarm conc no2 min
alarm conc nox min
alarm conc no max
alarm conc no2 max
alarm conc nox max
These commands report the NO, NO2, and NOx concentration alarm
minimum and maximum values current setting. The example below reports
that the NO concentration minimum is 5.2 ppb.
Send: alarm conc no min

Receive: alarm conc no min 5.2 ppb
set alarm conc no min value

set alarm conc no2 min value
set alarm conc nox min value
set alarm conc no max value
set alarm conc no2 max value
set alarm conc nox max value
These commands set the NO, NO2, and NOx concentration alarm
minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point
representation of the concentration alarm limits. Values must be in the
units that are currently set for use. The example below sets the NO
concentration alarm maximum value to 215.
Send: set alarm conc no max 215

Receive: set alarm conc no max 215 ok
alarm converter temp min

alarm converter temp max
These commands report the converter temperature alarm minimum and
converter temperature alarm minimum value is 300.0 C.
Send: alarm converter temp min

Receive: alarm converter temp min 300.0 deg C
set alarm converter temp min value

set alarm converter temp max value
These commands set the converter temperature alarm minimum and
representing converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example
below sets the converter temperature alarm maximum value to 340.0 C.
Send: set alarm converter temp max 340

Receive: set alarm converter temp max 340 ok

Alarms
alarm cooler temp min

alarm cooler temp max
These commands report the cooler temperature alarm minimum and
maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the cooler
temperature alarm minimum value is -10.0 C.
Send: alarm cooler temp min

Receive: alarm cooler temp min -10.0 deg C
set alarm cooler temp min value

set alarm cooler temp max value
These commands set the cooler temperature alarm minimum and
representing cooler temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example
below sets the cooler temperature alarm maximum value to -2.0 C.
Send: set alarm cooler temp max -2.0

Receive: set alarm cooler temp max -2.0 ok
alarm internal temp min

alarm internal temp max
These commands report the internal temperature alarm minimum and
internal temperature alarm minimum value is 15.0 C.
Send: alarm internal temp min

Receive: alarm internal temp min 15.0 deg C
set alarm internal temp min value

set alarm internal temp max value
These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and
representing internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example
below sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 35.0 C.
Send: set alarm internal temp max 35

Receive: set alarm internal temp max 35 ok
alarm pressure min

alarm pressure max
These commands report the pressure alarm minimum and maximum value
current settings. The example below reports that the pressure alarm
minimum value is 150 mmHg.
Send: alarm pressure min

Receive: alarm pressure min 150 mmHg

Alarms
set alarm pressure min value

set alarm pressure max value
These commands set the pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to
value, where value is a floating-point number representing pressure alarm
limits in millimeters of mercury. The example below sets the pressure alarm
maximum value to 290 mmHg.
Send: set alarm pressure max 290

Receive: set alarm pressure max 290 ok
alarm sample flow min

alarm sample flow max
These commands report the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum
value current settings. The example below reports that the sample flow
alarm minimum value is 0.300 LPM.
Send: alarm sample flow min

Receive: alarm sample flow min 0.3 l/min
set alarm sample flow min value

set alarm sample flow max value
These commands set the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum
values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing sample
flow alarm limits in liters per minute. The example below sets the sample
flow alarm maximum value to 1 LPM.
Send: set alarm sample flow max 1

Receive: set alarm sample flow max 1 ok
alarm trig conc no

alarm trig conc no2
alarm trig conc nox
This command reports the NO, NO2, and NOx concentration alarm
trigger action for minimum alarm, current setting, to either floor or ceiling.
The example below shows the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger
to ceiling, according to Table B3.
Send: alarm trig conc no

Receive: alarm trig conc no 1
set alarm trig conc no value

set alarm trig conc no2 value
set alarm trig conc nox value
These commands set the NO, NO2, and NOx concentration alarm
minimum value, where value is set to either floor or ceiling, according to
Table B3. The example below sets the NO concentration minimum alarm
trigger to ceiling.

Diagnostics
Send: set alarm trig conc no 1

Receive: set alarm trig conc no 1 ok
Table B3. Alarm Trigger Values

Value Alarm Trigger
00 Floor
01 Ceiling
Diagnostics diag volt mb

This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the
motherboard. The sequence of voltages is: Positive 24, positive 15, positive
5, positive 3.3, and negative 3.3. Each voltage value is separated by a space.
Send: diag volt mb

Receive: diag volt mb 24.1 14.9 4.9 3.2 -3.2
diag volt mib

This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the
measurement interface board. The sequence of voltages is: Positive 24,
positive 15, negative 15, positive 5, positive 3.3, and positive 15. Each
voltage value is separated by a space.
Send: diag volt mib

Receive: diag volt mib 24.1 14.9 -14.9 4.9 3.2 14.9
diag volt iob

This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I/O
expansion board. The sequence of voltages is: Positive 24, positive 5,
positive 3.3, and negative 3.3. Each voltage value is separated by a space.
Send: diag volt iob

Receive: diag volt iob 24.1 4.9 3.2 -3.2
version
This command reports the version of all the firmware components. The
following example shows a list of the firmware components that were
displayed by issuing the version command.
Send: version
Receive: version
Program = 01.05.79.225
Library = 01.01.60.167
Kernal = 2.4.24-uc0-003-Thermo
Board = 81, File = /usr/application.hex
Board App = 11.3.100 BI 4.0.97
File App = 11.3.100 BI 4.0.97

Datalogging
Board = 84, File = /usr/application.hex

Board App = 11.3.100 BI 4.0.97
File App = 11.3.100 BI 4.0.97
Arc BI = 170711*
Datalogging clr records

This command will clear all long and short records that have been saved.
Send: clr records

Receive: clr records ok
set clr lrecs

set clr srecs
These commands will clear only the long records or only the short records
that have been saved. The example below clears short records.
Send: set clr srecs

Receive: set clr srecs ok
data treatment lrec

data treatment srec
These commands report the current selection of data treatment for
concentrations in the long records (lrecs) or short records (srecs). The
example below reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec is
minimum.
Send: data treatment lrec

Receive: data treatment lrec min
set data treatment lrec string

set data treatment srec string
string = | cur | avg | min | max |
These commands set the data treatment to current, average, minimum, or
maximum for the concentration values recorded in the long records (lrecs)
or short records (srecs). The example below sets the data treatment for
concentrations in lrec to minimum.
Send: set data treatment lrec min

Receive: set data treatment lrec min ok
list din
list dout
These commands report the current selection for the digital outputs in the
format. Output no Index number variable name active state. The active
state for digital outputs is open or closed. The active state for digital inputs
is high or low.

Datalogging
Send: list dout

Receive: list dout
output index variable state
1 35 CONC ALARM open
3 4 UNITS open
4 11 GEN ALARM closed
7 7 NO MODE open
8 8 NOX MODE open
list lrec
list srec
list stream
list sp
These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data,
srec logging data, streaming data output, or the scratch pad (sp) list.
The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of
selections for lrec, srec, or streaming data items. The user can copy any of
these lists to the scratch pad, modify individual elements in the list, then
save the scratch pad back to the original list. Refer to the sp field
command for information on how to edit the scratch pad.
The following example shows the list for streaming data output.
Send: list stream

Receive: list stream
field index variable
x x time
1 1 no
2 2 no2
3 3 nox
4 18 intt
5 25 pres
6 26 smplf
er xy
lr xy
sr xy
x=|0|1| : Reply termination format (see set format format
command)
y = | 0 | 1 | 2 | : Output format (see set erec/lrec/srec format format
command)
These commands report the last long and short records stored or the
dynamic data record. In the example below, the command requests a long
record with no checksum, in ASCII format with text. For details on how to
decode the flag fields within these records, see the flags command.
Send: lr01
Receive: lr01

Datalogging
12:31 02-22-03 flags 54089100 no -8413E-1 nox -8485E-1

lono -6471E-1 lonox -6527E-1 pres 130.9 pmtt 53.2 intt
80.0 rctt 80.0 convt 61 smplf 0.500 ozonf 0.000 pmtv -
115
erec
This command returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions
(measurements and status) at the time the command is issued. The
following example shows a typical response.
The format is defined by the current settings of the format and erec
format commands. For details on erec formatting, see the Record Layout
Definition section at the end of this appendix. For details on how to
Send: erec
Receive: erec
10:11 04-06-05 flags DD008000 no 0.000 nox 0.000 no2
0.000 1 lono 147.500 lonox 0.000 lono2 0.000 1 pmtv
805.491 tempal 1 pres 172.278 pcal 150.000 smplf 0.000
ozonf 0.050 hiavgtime 10 loavgtime 10 nobkg 0.000
noxbkg 0.000 nocoef 1.000 noxcoef 1.000 no2coef 1.000
lonocoef 1.000 lonoxcoef 1.000 lono2coef 1.000 norange
100000.000 noxrange 100000.000 no2range 100000.000
lonorange 100000.000 lonoxrange 100000.000 lono2range
100000.000
lrec
srec
lrec xxxx yy
srec xxxx yy
lrec aa:bb oo-pp-qq yy
srec aa:bb oo-pp-qq yy
xxxx = the number of past records
yy = the number of records to return (1 to 10)
aa = hours (01 to 24)
bb = minutes (01 to 59)
oo = month (01 to 12)
pp = day (01 to 31)
qq = year
These commands output long or short records and dynamic data. The
output format is determined by the set lrec format, and set srec format
commands. The logging time is determined by the set lrec per and set
srec per commands. In dual range, the long records and short records
contain the high and low NO and NOx concentrations. In single range the
low NO and low NOx values are set to 0 and the high NO and high NOx
are used. In NO or NOx only mode, the pertinent high value used, other

Datalogging
concentrations are set to 0. Concentrations are stored in either ppb or

g/m3.
In the following example, there are 740 long records currently stored in
memory. When the command lrec 100 5 is sent, the instrument counts
back 100 records from the last record collected (record 740), and then
returns 5 records: 640, 641, 642, 643, and 644. For details on how to
Send: lrec 5
Receive: lrec 100 5
11:03 02-22-03 flags 54089100 no 8416E-1 nox 8458E-1
lono 6474E-1 lonox 6506E-1 pres 131.4 pmtt 53.1 intt
116
11:04 02-22-03 flags 54089100 no 8421E-1 nox 8457E-1
116
11:05 02-22-03 flags 54089100 no 8440E-1 nox 8456E-1
116
11:06 02-22-03 flags 54089100 no 8432E-1 nox 8483E-1
116
11:07 02-22-03 flags 54089100 no 8442E-1 nox 8383E-1
116
where:
pmtv = PMT Voltage

pmtt = PMT Temperature
intt = Internal Temperature
rctt = Reaction Chamber Temperature
convt = NO2 Converter Temperature
smplf = Sample Flow
ozonf = Ozonator Flow
pres = Pressure
erec format
lrec format
srec format
These commands report the output format for long and short records, and
dynamic data in various formats such as ASCII without text, ASCII with
text, or binary. The example below shows the output format for long
records is ASCII with text, according to Table B4.

Datalogging
Send: lrec format

Receive: lrec format 1
set erec format format

set lrec format format
set srec format format
These commands set the output format for long and short records, and
dynamic data, according to Table B4. The example below sets the long
record output format to ASCII with text.
Send: set lrec format 1

Receive: set lrec format 1 ok
Table B4. Record Output Formats

Format Output Format
0 ASCII no text
1 ASCII with text
2 Binary data
erec layout
lrec layout
srec layout
These commands report the layout (string indicating the data formats) for
data that is sent out in response to the erec, lrec, srec, and related
commands. For details on how to interpret the strings, see Record Layout
Definition later in this appendix.
Send: lrec layout

Receive: lrec layout %s %s %lx %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f
%f
t D L ffffffffffff
flags no nox hino hinox pres pmtt intt rctt convt smplf
ozonf pmtv
lrec mem size

srec mem size
These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs that can be stored
with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and
srecs. The example that follows shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for
lrecs and the maximum number of lrecs that can be stored in memory is
241979. Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command.
Send: lrec mem size

Receive: lrec mem size 241979 recs, 1075 blocks

Datalogging
lrec per
srec per
These commands report the long and short records logging period. The
example below shows that the short record logging period is 5 minutes.
Send: srec per

Receive: srec per 5 min
set lrec per value

set srec per value
value = | 1 | 5 | 15 | 30 | 60 |
These commands set the long and short records logging period to value in
minutes. The example below sets the long record logging period to 15
minutes.
Send: set lrec per 15

Receive: set lrec per 15 ok
no of lrec
no of srec
These commands report the number of long and short records stored in the
long and short records memory. The example below shows that 50 long
records have been stored in the memory.
Send: no of lrec
Receive: no of lrec 50 recs
malloc lrec
malloc srec
These commands report the currently set memory allocation for long and
short records in percent of total memory.
Send: malloc lrec

Receive: malloc lrec 10%
set malloc lrec value

set malloc srec value
value = 0 to 100
These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for long and
short records to value, where value is a floating-point number representing
percent. The example below sets the memory allocation for long records to
10.
Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logging data memory. All
the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands, if
required.

Datalogging
Send: set malloc lrec 10

Receive: set malloc lrec 10 ok
set copy sp to lrec

set copy sp to srec
set copy sp to stream
These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad (sp) into the
lrec, srec, or streaming data list.
save the scratch pad back to the original list. For more information on how
to edit the scratch pad, see the sp field command.
The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs
list.
Send: set copy sp to lrec

Receive: set copy sp to lrec ok
set copy lrec to sp

set copy srec to sp
set copy stream to sp
These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad (sp) into the
lrec, srec, or streaming data list.
save the scratch pad back to the original list. For more information on how
to edit the scratch pad, see the sp field command.
The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs
list.
Send: set copy lrec to sp

Receive: set copy lrec to sp ok
sp field number
This command reports the variable number and name stored at the index in
the scratch pad list.
save the scratch pad back to the original list.
The following example shows that field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index
number 13, which is for the variable pressure.

Datalogging
Send: sp field 5
Receive: sp field 5 13 pres
set sp field number value

number = 1-32 for lrec and srec lists, 1-8 for streaming data lists
This command sets the scratch pad field number (item number in scratch
pad list) to value, where value is the index number of a variable in the
analog out variable list. Available variables and their corresponding index
numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout. The set sp
field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be
transferred into the long record, short record, or streaming data lists, using
the set copy sp to lrec, set copy sp to srec, or set copy sp to stream
commands.
Send: set sp field 1 34

Receive: set sp field 1 34 ok
stream per
This command reports the currently set time interval in seconds for
streaming data.
Send: stream per

Receive: stream per 10
set stream per number value

number value = | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 30 | 60 | 90 |120 | 180 | 240 | 300 |
This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming
data strings to number value in seconds. The example below sets the
number value to 10 seconds.
Send: set stream per 10

Receive: set stream per 10 ok
stream time
This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp
attached to it or not, according to Table B5.
Send: stream time

Receive: stream time 0
set stream time value

This command enables value, where value is to attach or disable time stamp
to streaming data string, according to Table B5. The example below
attaches a time stamp to streaming data.
Send: set stream time 0

Receive: set stream time 0 ok

Calibration
Table B5. Stream Time Values

Value Stream Time
00 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string
01 Disables time stamp to streaming data string
Calibration set cal no bkg

set cal nox bkg
These commands will auto-calibrate the NO, and NOx backgrounds. If the
instrument is set to manual NOx mode, the response to set cal no bkg
will be cant, wrong settings. The example below shows a successful auto-
calibration of the NO background.
Send: set cal no bkg

Receive: set cal no bkg ok
set cal no coef

set cal no2 coef
set cal nox coef
set cal high no coef
set cal high no2 coef
set cal high nox coef
set cal low no coef
set cal low no2 coef
set cal low nox coef
These commands will auto-calibrate NO, NO2, and NOx coefficients based
on NO, NO2, and NOx span gas concentrations. The high and low
commands are only available in dual and auto range mode. If the mode is
incorrect, the instrument responds with cant, wrong settings. The
example below shows a successful auto-calibration of the low NO
coefficient.
Send: set cal low no coef

Receive: set cal low no coef ok
no coef
no2 coef
nox coef
high no coef
high no2 coef
high nox coef
low no coef
low no2 coef
low nox coef

Calibration
These commands report NO, NO2, and NOx coefficients in single range
mode, or the high and low range coefficients in dual or auto range mode. If
the mode is incorrect, the instrument responds with cant, wrong
settings. The example below reports that the NO coefficient is 1.000.
Send: no coef
Receive: no coef 1.000
set no coef value

set no2 coef value
set nox coef value
set high no coef value
set high no2 coef value
set high nox coef value
set low no coef value
set low no2 coef value
set low nox coef value
These commands set the NO, NO2, and NOx coefficients to user-defined
values to value, where value is a floating-point representation of the
coefficient. The example below sets the NO coefficient to 1.005.
Send: set no coef 1.005

Receive: set no coef 1.005 ok
no gas
no2 gas
nox gas
high no gas
high no2 gas
high nox gas
low no gas
low no2 gas
low nox gas
These commands report NO, NO2, and NOx span gas concentrations used
to auto-calibrate NO, NO2, and NOx coefficients. The high and low
commands are only available in dual and auto range mode. If the mode is
example below reports that the NO low span gas concentration is 240.0
ppb.
Send: low no gas

Receive: low no gas 2400E-1 ppb
set no gas value

set no2 gas value
set nox gas value
set high no gas value

Calibration
set high no2 gas value

set high nox gas value
set low no gas value
set low no2 gas value
set low nox coef value
These commands set the NO, NO2, and NOx span gas concentrations used
by the auto-calibration routine to value, where value is a floating-point
representation of the gas concentration in current selected units. The gas
units are the same as those chosen by the user. The example below sets the
NO span gas concentration to 123.4 ppb.
Send: set no gas 123.4

Receive: set no gas 123.4 ok
no bkg
nox bkg
bkg no
bkg nox
These commands report the current NO and NOx backgrounds. The
example below reports that the NO background is 5.5 ppb.
Send: no bkg
Receive: no bkg 5.5 ppb
set no bkg value

set nox bkg value
set bkg no value
set bkg nox value
These commands are used to set NO and NOx backgrounds to user-
defined values to value, where value is a floating-point representation of the
background in current selected units. The example below sets the NO
background to 5.5 ppb.
Send: set no bkg 5.5

Receive: set no bkg 5.5 ok
set cal perm gas offset res res

This command calibrates the permeation gas temperature sensor offset
using a calibrating resistor of value res in ohms.
Send: set cal perm gas offset res 5000

Receive: set cal perm gas offset res 5000 ok
set cal perm gas offset temp temp

This command calibrates the permeation gas temperature sensor offset to a
temperature of temp in degrees C.

Calibration
Send: set cal perm gas offset temp 34.5

Receive: set cal perm gas offset temp 34.5 ok
set cal perm oven offset res res

This command calibrates the permeation oven temperature sensor offset
using a calibrating resistor of value res in ohms.
Send: set cal perm oven offset res 5000

Receive: set cal perm oven offset res 5000 ok
span dev
This command reports the span deviation (span check offset). The
following example reports that the span deviation is 1 ppb.
Send: span dev

Receive: span dev 1.000 E+00
set span dev value

This command sets the span deviation (span check offset) to value, where
value is a floating-point representation of the gas concentration in current
selected units. The following example sets the span deviation to 345 ppb.
Send: set span dev 345

Receive: set span dev 345 ok
zero dev
This command reports the zero deviation (maximum zero check offset).
The following example reports that the zero deviation is 10 ppb.
Send: zero dev

Receive: zero dev 1.000 E+01
set zero dev value

This command sets the zero deviation (maximum zero check offset) to
value, where value is a floating-point representation of the gas
concentration in current selected units. The following example sets the zero
deviation to 10 ppb.
Send: set zero dev 1.000 E+01

Receive: set zero dev 1.000 E+01 ok
span cal reset

This command reports that the span cal reset is on or off. The following
example reports that the span cal reset it on.
Send: span cal reset

Receive: span cal reset on

Calibration
set span cal reset onoff

onoff = | on | off |
This command sets the span cal reset to on or off. The following example
sets the span cal reset to off.
Send: set span cal reset off

Receive: set span cal reset off ok
zero cal reset

This command reports that the zero cal reset is on or off. The following
example reports that the zero cal reset it on.
Send: zero cal reset

Receive: zero cal reset on
set zero cal reset onoff

This command sets the zero cal reset to on or off. The following example
sets the zero cal reset to off.
Send: set zero cal reset off

Receive: set zero cal reset off ok
span dur
This command reports the span duration. The following example reports
that the span duration is 10 minutes.
Send: span dur

Receive: span dur 10 min
set span dur value

This command sets the span duration to value, where value represents the
span duration in minutes. The following example sets the span duration to
15 minutes.
Send: set span duration 15

Receive: set span duration 15 ok
zero dur
This command reports the zero duration. The following example reports
that the zero duration is 10 minutes.
Send: zero dur

Receive: zero dur 10 min

Calibration
set zero dur value

This command sets the zero duration to value, where value represents the
zero duration in minutes. The following example sets the zero duration to
15 minutes.
Send: set zero duration 15

Receive: set zero duration 15 ok
zs period
This command reports the zero/span (z/s) period. The following example
reports that the zero/span period is 24 hours.
Send: zs period
Receive: zs period 24 hr
set zs period value

This command sets the zero/span period to value, where value represents
the zero/span period in hours. The following example sets the zero/span
period to 24 hours.
Send: set zs period 24

Receive: set zs period 24 hr ok
zs avg time
This command reports the zero/span (z/s) averaging time in seconds. The
following example reports that the zero/span averaging time is 30 seconds,
according to Table B2.
Send: zs avg time

Receive: zs avg time 5:30 sec
set zs avg time selection

This command sets the zero/span averaging time, according to Table B2.
The following example sets the zero/span averaging time to 120 seconds.
Send: set zs avg time 8

Receive: set zs avg time 8 ok

Keys/Display
Keys/Display push button

do ri
down right
en ru
enter run
he up
help 1
le 2
left 3
me 4
menu
button = | do | down | en | enter | he | help | le | left | me | menu | ri | right |
ru | run | up | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons. The
numbers represent the front panel soft keys, from left to right.
Send: push enter

Receive: push enter ok
isc
iscreen
This command retrieves the framebuffer data used for the display on the
iSeries instrument. It is 19200 bytes in size, 2-bits per pixel, 4 pixels per
byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters. The data is sent in RLE encoded
form to save time in transmission. It is sent as a type '5' binary C-Link
response with no checksum.
The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8-bit count of
consecutive 0xFF bytes. The following 'c' code will expand the incoming
data.

Keys/Display
void unpackDisplay ( void far* tdib, unsigned char far* rlescreen )

{
int i,j,k;
unsigned char far *sc4bpp, *sc2bpp, *screen, *ptr;
ptr = screen = (unsigned char far *)malloc(19200);

//RLE decode the screen
for (i=0; i<19200 && (ptr - screen) < 19200; i++)
{
*(ptr++) = *(rlescreen + i);
if (*(rlescreen + i) == 0)
{
unsigned char rlecount = *(unsigned char *)(rlescreen + ++i);
while (rlecount)
{
*(ptr++) = 0;
rlecount--;
}
}
else if (*(rlescreen + i) == 0xff)
{
unsigned char rlecount = *(unsigned char *)(rlescreen + ++i);
while (rlecount)
{
*(ptr++) = 0xff;
rlecount--;
}
}
}
}
To convert this data into a BMP for use with windows, it needs to be
turned into a 4BPP as that is the smallest windows can display. Also note
that BMP files are upside down relative to this data, i.e. the top display line
is the last line in the BMP.
menutext
This command displays the text of the menu item where the cursor is
currently positioned. The following example shows that the cursor is
positioned at the instrument controls menu item.
Send: menutext
Receive: menu text main menu instrument controls
sc
screen
This command is meant for backward compatibility on the C series. Screen
information is reported using the iscreen command above.
Send: screen
Receive: screen
This is an I series
Instrument. Screen
Information not
available

Measurement Configuration
Measurement range no
range no2
Configuration range nox
high range no
high range no2
high range nox
low range no
low range no2
low range nox
These commands report NO, NO2, and NOx range in single range mode,
or the high and low ranges in dual or auto range mode. If the mode is
example below reports that the NO full-scale range is set to 50 ppb,
according to Table B6 and Table B7.
Send: range no
Receive: range no 0: 5000E-2 ppb
set range Selection

set high range Selection
set low range Selection
These commands select the NO, NO2, and NOx full-scale ranges,
according to Table B6 and Table B7. The example below sets the NO
full-scale range to 2,000 ppb.
Send: set range 5

Receive: set range 5 ok
Table B6. Standard Ranges

Selection ppb ppm gm3 mgm3
0 50 0.05 100 0.1
1 100 0.10 200 0.2
2 200 0.20 500 0.5
3 500 0.50 1,000 1.0
4 1,000 1.00 2,000 2.0
5 2,000 2.00 5,000 5.0
6 5,000 5.00 10,000 10.0
7 10,000 10.00 20,000 20.0
8 20,000 20.00 30,000 30.0
9 C1 C1 C1 C1
10 C2 C2 C2 C2


11 C3 C3 C3 C3
Table B7. Extended Ranges

0 200 0.2 500 0.5
1 500 0.5 1,000 1
2 1,000 1 2,000 2
3 2,000 2 5,000 5
4 5,000 5 10,000 10
5 10,000 10 20,000 20
6 20,000 20 50,000 50
7 50,000 50 100,000 100
8 100,000 100 150,000 150
9 C1 C1 C1 C1
10 C2 C2 C2 C2
11 C3 C3 C3 C3
custom range
range = | 1 | 2 | 3 |
This command reports the user-defined value of custom range 1, 2, or 3.
The example below reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5.50 ppb.
Send: custom 1
Receive: custom 1 550E-2 ppb
set custom range range value

set custom 1 value
set custom 2 value
set custom 3 value
set custom 1 range value
These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the
three custom ranges 1, 2, or 3 to range value, where value is a floating-point
number representing concentration in ppb ppm, g/m3 or mg/m3. The
example below sets the custom 1 range to 55.5 ppb.

Send: set custom 1 range 55.5

Receive: set custom 1 range 55.5 ok
range mode
This command reports the current range mode.
Send: range mode

Receive: range mode single
set range mode mode

This command sets the current range mode to single, dual, or auto. The
example below sets the range mode to single.
Send: set range mode single

Receive: set range mode single ok
gas mode
This command reports the current mode of sample, zero, or span. The
example below reports that the gas mode is sample.
Send: gas mode

Receive: gas mode sample
set sample
set sample gas
These commands set the zero/span valves to the sample mode. The
example below sets the instrument to sample mode, that is, the instrument
is reading the sample gas.
Send: set sample

Receive: set sample ok
set zero
set zero gas
These commands set the zero/span valves to the zero mode. The example
below sets the instrument to zero mode that is, the instrument is reading
the sample gas.
Send: set zero

Receive: set zero ok
set span
set span gas
These commands set the zero/span valves to the span mode. The example
below sets the instrument to span mode that is, the instrument is sampling
span gas.

Send: set span

Receive: set span ok
gas unit
This command reports the current gas units (ppb, ppm, g/m3, or mg/m3).
The example reports that the gas unit is set to ppb.
Send: gas unit

Receive: gas unit ppb
set gas unit unit

unit = | ppb | ppm | g/m3 | mg/m3 |
This command sets the gas units to ppb, ppm, g/m3, or mg/m3. The
example below sets the gas units to mg/m3.
Send: set gas unit mg/m3

Receive: set gas unit mg/m3 ok
meas mode
This command reports which measurement mode (NO/NOx, NO, or
NOx) is active. The example below reports that the measurement mode is
set to NO.
Send: meas mode

Receive: meas mode no
set meas mode mode

mode = | no/nox | no | nox | pre |
This command sets the instrument to NO/NOx (auto) mode, manual NO
mode, or manual NOx mode. The example below sets the instrument to
the manual NO mode.
Send: set meas mode no

Receive: set meas mode no ok
pres comp
This command reports whether pressure compensation is on or off. The
example below shows that pressure compensation is on.
Send: pres comp

Receive: pres comp on
set pres comp onoff

These commands turn the pressure compensation on or off. The example
below turns pressure compensation off.
Send: set pres comp off

Receive: set pres comp off ok

Hardware Configuration
temp comp
This command reports whether temperature compensation is on or off.
The example below shows the temperature compensation is off.
Send: temp comp

Receive: temp comp off
set temp comp onoff

These commands turn the temperature compensation on or off. The
example below turns temperature compensation off.
Send: set temp comp off

Receive: set temp comp off ok
Hardware contrast
This command reports the screens level of contrast. The example below
Configuration shows the screen contrast is 50%, according to Table B8.
Send: contrast
Receive: contrast 10:50%
set contrast level

This command sets the screens level of contrast, according to Table B8.
The example below sets the contrast level to 50%.
Send: set contrast 10

Receive: set contrast 10 ok
Table B8. Contrast Levels

Level Contrast Level
0 0%
1 5%
2 10%
3 15%
4 20%
5 25%
6 30%
7 35%
8 40%
9 45%
10 50%
11 55%

Level Contrast Level

12 60%
13 65%
14 70%
15 75%
16 80%
17 85%
18 90%
19 95%
20 100%
conv set temp

This command reports the temperature that the NO2 converter is set to.
The example below reports that the converter temperature is set to 625 C.
Send: conv set temp

Receive: conv set temp 625 deg C
set conv set temp value

This command sets the temperature that the NO2 converter is set to, where
value is an integer representing dwgrees C. The example below sets the
converter temperature to 625 C.
Send: set conv set temp

Receive: set conv set temp 625 deg C ok
date
This command reports the current date. The example below reports the
date as December 1, 2004.
Send: date
Receive: date 12-01-04
set date mm-dd-yy

mm = month
dd = day
yy = year
This command sets the date of the analyzers internal clock. The example
below sets the date to December 1, 2004.
Send: set date 12-01-04

Receive: set date 12-01-04 ok

set default params

This command sets all the parameters to their default values. This does not
affect the factory-calibrated parameters.
Send: set default params

Receive: set default params ok
ozonator
This command reports the ozonator is on or off. The example below
reports that the ozonator is on.
Send: ozonator
Receive: ozonator on
set ozonator onoff

These commands set the ozonator on or off. The example below sets the
ozonator off.
Send: set ozonator off

Receive: set ozonator off ok
ozonator flow
This command reports the current ozonator flow. The example below
reports that the current ozonator flow is 0.050 LPM.
Send: ozonator flow

Receive: ozonator flow 0.050 l/m
ozonator safety
This command reports the status of the ozonator safety on or off. The
example below reports that the ozonator safety is on.
Send: ozonator safety

Receive: ozonator safety on
set ozonator safety onoff

These commands set the ozonator safety on or off. The example below sets
the ozonator safety off.
Send: set ozonator safety off

Receive: set ozonator safety off ok
ozonator status
This command reports the status of the ozonator and safety. The example
below reports that the ozonator is off.
Send: ozonator status

Receive: ozonator status off

pmt status
This command reports the status of the PMT on or off. The example
below reports that the PMT is on.
Send: pmt status

Receive: pmt status on
set pmt onoff

These commands set the PMT on or off. The example below turns the
PMT off.
Send: set pmt off

Receive: set pmt off ok
save
set save params
This command stores all current parameters in FLASH memory. It is
important that each time instrument parameters are changed, that this
command be sent. If changes are not saved, they will be lost in the event of
a power failure. The example below saves the parameters to FLASH
memory.
Send: set save params

Receive: set save params ok
time
This command reports the current time (24-hour time). The example
below reports that the internal time is 2:15:30 pm.
Send: time
Receive: time 14:15:30
set time hh:mm:ss

hh = hours
mm = minutes
ss = seconds
This command sets the internal clock (24-hour time). The example below
sets the internal time to 2:15 pm.
Note If seconds are omitted, the seconds default to 00.
Send: set time 14:15

Receive: set time 14:15 ok

Communications Configuration
Communications addr dns

This command reports the TCP/IP address for the domain name server.
Configuration
Send: addr dns
Receive: addr dns 192.168.1.1
set addr dns address

This command sets the dns address, where address consists of four numbers
ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by ..
Send: set addr dns 192.168.1.1

Receive: set addr dns 192.168.1.1 ok
addr gw
This command reports the default TCP/IP gateway address.
Send: addr gw
Receive: addr gw 192.168.1.1
set addr gw address

This command sets the default gateway address, where address consists of
four numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by ..
Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on. Refer to the
DHCP command that follows for additional information.
Send: set addr gw 192.168.1.1

Receive: set addr gw 192.168.1.1 ok
addr ip
This command reports the IP address of the analyzer.
Send: addr ip
Receive: addr ip 192.168.1.15
set addr ip address

This command sets the analyzers IP address, where address consists of four
numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by ..
Send: set addr ip 192.168.1.15

Receive: set addr ip 192.168.1.15 ok

addr nm
This command reports the IP netmask.
Send: addr nm
Receive: addr nm 255.255.255.0
set addr nm address

This command sets the nm address, where address consists of four numbers
ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by ..
Send: set addr nm 255.255.255.0

Receive: set addr nm 255.255.255.0 ok
addr ntp
This command reports the IP address for the network time protocol server.
See Network Time Protocol Servier in the Communications Settings
section of the Operation chapter for more information.
Send: addr ip
Receive: addr ip 192.168.1.15
set addr ip address

This command sets the NTP time server address, where address consists of
four numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by ..
Send: set addr ip 192.168.1.15

Receive: set addr ip 192.168.1.15 ok
baud
This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port
(RS232/RS485). The example below reports that the current baud rate is
9600 baud.
Send: baud
Receive: baud 9600
set baud rate

rate = | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 |
This command sets the instrument baud rate. The example below sets the
instruments baud rate to 9600.
Note After the command is sent, the baud rate of the sending device must
be changed to agree with the instrument.

Send: set baud 9600

Receive: set baud 9600 ok
dhcp
This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) as on or off. DHCP is used to assign an
IP address to the instrument automatically. The following example shows
that DHCP is on.
Send: dhcp
Receive: dhcp on
set dhcp onoff

This command enables (on) and disables (off) the DHCP service. When
DHCP is set to on, the instrument gets the IP address, the netmask
address, and the gateway address from a DHCP server. When DHCP is set
to off, the instrument gets these addresses from system memory. The
following example sets the DHCP service to on.
Note If DHCP is changed from on to off and then the IP address, the
netmask address, or the gateway address is changed, you must cycle power
to the instrument before the change takes effect. Until you cycle the power,
the address assigned by the DHCP server will still be used and reported as
the current address.
Send: set dhcp on

Receive: set dhcp on ok
format
This command reports the current reply termination format. The example
below shows that the reply format is 00, which means reply with no
checksum, according to Table B9.
Send: format
Receive: format 00
set format format

This command sets the reply termination format, where format is set
according to Table B9. The example below sets the reply termination
format to checksum.
Send: set format 01

Receive: set format 01 ok

Table B9. Reply Termination Formats

Format Reply Termination
00 <CR>
01 <NL> sum xxxx <CR>
where xxxx = 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the
characters (bytes) in the message
host name
This command reports the host name string. The following example
reports the host name is set to iSeries. This command returns bad cmd if
no host name has been set.
Send: host name

Receive: host name iSeries
set host name string

This command sets the host name string, where string is 1-13 alphanumeric
characters (with no spaces). The following example sets the host name to
analyzer01. This command returns bad cmd if no host name has been
set.
Send: set host name analyzer01

Receive: set host name analyzer01 ok
instr name
This command reports the instrument name.
Send: instr name

Receive: instr name
NO-NO2-NOx Analyzer
NO-NO2-NOx Analyzer
instrument id
This command reports the instrument id.
Send: instrument id
Receive: instrument id 42
set instrument id value

This command sets the instrument id to value, where value is a decimal
number between 0 and 127 inclusive.
Note Sending this command via RS-232 or RS-485 will require the host to
use the new id for subsequent commands.

Send: set instrument id 50

Receive: set instrument id 50 ok
mode
This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in: local,
service, or remote. The example below shows that the instrument is in the
remote mode.
Send: mode
Receive: mode remote
set mode local

set mode remote
These commands set the instrument to local or remote mode. The example
below sets the instrument to the local mode.
Send: set mode local

Receive: set mode local ok
allow mode cmd

This command reports the current allow mode setting: 1 = allow set mode
local or set mode remote commands; 0 = ignore set mode local or set
mode remote commands. The default value is 0; ignore the commands
(refer to the table that follows). The example that follows shows that the
instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote
commands.
Send: allow mode cmd
Receive: allow mode cmd 0
set allow mode cmd value

This command is used to configure the instrument to value, where value is
either 1 = accept or 0 = ignore the set mode local and set mode remote
commands. Refer to the table that follows.
If the instrument is set to accept the commands (value = 1), the set mode
local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to
make changes via the front panel.
If the instrument is set to ignore the commands (value = 0), the instrument
will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted
upon, but will not change the instrument lock status (this is for
compatibility with systems expecting an ok response).
Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with
the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote
regardless of the above setting.

The following example sets the instrument to accept the set mode local
or set mode remote commands.
Send: set allow mode cmd 1
Receive: set allow mode cmd 1 ok
Table B10. Allow Mode Command Values

Value Allow Mode Command
0 Ignore (default)
1 Accept
power up mode
This command reports the current power up mode setting either 0 =
local/unlocked or 1 = remote/locked according to Table B11. The default
value is 0; power up in local/unlocked mode. The following example shows
that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote/locked mode.
Send: power up mode
Receive: power up mode 1
set power up mode value

This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the
local/unlocked mode (value = 0) or the remote/locked mode (value = 1),
according to Table B11.
If the instrument is set to power up in the local/unlocked mode, the keypad
can be used to make changes via the front panel. If the instrument is set to
power up in the remote/locked mode, changes can not be made from the
front panel. The example that follows sets the instrument to power up in
remote/locked mode.
Send: set power up mode 1
Receive: set power up mode 1 ok
Table B11. Power Up Mode Values

Value Power Up Mode Command
0 Local/Unlocked (default)
1 Remote/Locked Mode
program no
This command reports the analyzers model information and program
version number, which will be dependant on the current version.

I/O Configuration
Send: program no
Receive: program no iSeries 42i 01.00.01.074
set layout ack

This command reports the stale layout/layout change indicator (*) that is
attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time
erec layout was requested, according to Table B12. The following example
reports that the instrument is configured to do nothing.
Send: layout ack

Receive: layout ack 0
set layout ack value

This command disables the stale layout/layout change indicator (*) that is
attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time
erec layout was requested, according to Table B12.
Send: set layout ack

Receive: set layout ack ok
Table B12. Set Layout Ack Values

Value Function
0 Do nothing (default)
1 Append *
tz
This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server. See
Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings
section of the Operation chapter for more information.
Send: tz
Receive: tz EST+5EDT
set tz string
This command sets the timezone string for the instrument for use with the
NTP server, where string is a standard timezone string. Common strings are
listed in the Timezone screen description in Chapter 3.
Send: set tz EST+5EDT

Receive: set tz EST+5EDT ok
I/O Configuration analog iout range channel

This command reports the analog current output range setting for channels,
where channel must be between 1 and 6, inclusive. The example below
reports current output channel 4 to the 4-20 mA range, according to Table

I/O Configuration
B13. This command responds with feature not enabled if the I/O
expansion board is not detected.
Send: analog iout range 4

Receive: analog iout range 4 2
set analog iout range channel range

This command sets analog current output channel to the channel range
where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive, and range is set according to
Table B13. The example below sets current output channel 4 to the 0-20
mA range. This command responds with feature not enabled if the I/O
expansion board is not detected.
Send: set analog iout range 4 1

Receive: set analog iout range 4 1 ok
Table B13. Analog Current Output Range Values

Range Output Range
1 0-20 mA
2 4-20 mA
0 [cannot be set to this, but may report] Undefined
analog vin channel

This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data, both the
calculated value and the actual voltage. In the example below, the
calculated value of channel 1 is 75.325 degrees F, volts are 2.796. This
command responds with feature not enabled if the I/O expansion board
is not detected.
Send: analog vin 1

Receive: analog vin 1 75.325 2.796
analog vout range channel

This command reports the analog voltage output channel range, where
channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive, according to Table B14.
Send: analog vout range 2

Receive: analog vout range 2 3
set analog vout range channel range

This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range, where
channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive, and range is set according to Table B
14. The example below sets channel 2 to the 0-10 V range.

I/O Configuration
Send: set analog vout range 2 3

Receive: set analog vout range 2 3 ok
Table B14. Analog Voltage Output Range Values

Range Output Range
1 0-1 V
2 0-100 mV
3 0-10 V
4 0-5 V
0 [cannot be set to this, but may report] Undefined
dig in
This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4-digit
hexadecimal string with the most significant bit (MSB) being input 16.
Send: dig in
Receive: dig in 0xff7f
din channel
This command reports the action assigned to the digital input channel and
index number of the corresponding active state. The following example
reports input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action
of analog outputs to zero with the active state being high.
Send: din 5
Receive: din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high
set din channel index state

This command assigns digital input channel (1-16) to activate the action
indicated by index (1-35), when the input transitions to the designated state
(high or low). Use the list din var command to obtain the list of
supported index values and corresponding actions. The following example
sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low-to-high transition.
Send: set din 1 3 high

Receive: set din 1 3 high ok
dout channel
This command reports the index number, output variable and the active
state assigned to digital output channel. The following example reports
output 4 to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of
general alarm.

I/O Configuration
Send: dout 4
Receive: dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open
set dout channel index state

This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action
associated with index, and assigns it an active state of state (open or closed).
Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index
values and corresponding state. The following example sets the digital
output channel 4 to state 11.
Send: set dout 4 11 open

Receive: set dout 4 11 open ok
dtoa channel
This command reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog
converters, according to Table B15. The following example shows that the
D/A #1 is 97.7% full-scale.
Send: dtoa 1
Receive: dtoa 1 97.7%
Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular

output, and that output is selected, the value will be 0.0.
All channel ranges are user definable. If any customization has been made
Table B15. Default Output Assignment

D to A Function Single Range Dual Range Auto Range
1 Voltage Output NO High NO High/Low NO
2 Voltage Output NO2 High NO2 High/Low NO2
3 Voltage Output NOx High NOx High/Low NOx
4 Voltage Output Not Used Low NO Range (NOx)
5 Voltage Output Not Used Low NO2 Not Used
6 Voltage Output Not Used Low NOx Not Used
7 Current Output NO High NO High/Low NO
8 Current Output NO2 High NO2 High/Low NO2
9 Current Output NOx High NOx High/Low NOx
10 Current Output Not Used Low NO Range (NOx)
11 Current Output Not Used Low NO2 Not Used
12 Current Output Not Used Low NOx Not Used

I/O Configuration
list var aout

list var dout
list var din
These commands report the list of index numbers, and the variables
(associated with that index number) available for selection in the current
mode (determined by single/dual/auto, gas mode) for analog output, digital
output and digital inputs. The index number is used to insert the variable
in a field location in a list using set sp field index. The example below
reports the list of analog output, index numbers, and variables.
Send: list var aout

Receive: list var aout
index variable
0 none
1 no
2 no2
3 nox
18 intt
19 rctt
20 pmtt
21 convt
25 pres
26 smplf
27 pmtv
28 ain1
29 ain2
30 ain3
31 ain4
32 ain5
33 ain6
34 ain7
35 ain8
mb read coils start count

start = index of first coil, count = number of coils to report
This command reports the current state of the MODBUS coils (digital
outputs). Output is in binary format with the coil start appearing as the
right-most bit.
Send: mb read coils 1 15

Receive: mb read coils 1 15 000000100000001
mb read registers start count

start = index of first register (must be odd number), count = number of
registers to report (must be even), each pair of registers is reported as a
float.

I/O Configuration
This command reports the current state of the MODBUS registers (analog
outputs). Output is in floating point format with the pair of registers start
and start+1 appearing as the left-most bit.
Send: mb read registers 5 4

Receive: mb read registers 5 4 552629.000000 55998800.000000
set mb write coil coil state

coil = index of coil to be set, state = 1 or 0
This command sets the current state of the MODBUS coil coil (digital
input). coil has an offset of 100 (that is, the first write coil is address 101).
Send: set mb write coil 104 1

Receive: set mb write coil 104 1 ok
relay stat
This command reports the current relay logic normally open or normally
closed, if all the relays are set to same state, that is all open or all closed.
The example below shows that the status when all the relays logic is set to
normally open.
Send: relay stat

Receive: relay stat open
Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the
response would be a 4-digit hexadecimal string with the least significant
byte (LSB) being relay no 1.
For example:
Receive: relay stat 0x0001 (indicates relay no 1 is set to

normally open logic, all others are normally closed)
Receive: relay stat 0x0005 (indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set
to be normally open logic, all others are normally
closed)
set relay open

set relay open value
set relay closed
set relay closed value
These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay
number value, where value is the relay between 1 and 16. The example
below sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open.
Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all
the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open/closed.

Record Layout Definition
Send: set relay open 1

Receive: set relay open 1 ok
Record Layout The Erec, Lrec Srec layouts contain the following:
Definition A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses
A format specifier for parsing binary responses
In addition to these the Erec Layout contains:
A format specifier for producing the front-panel displays
Values are read in using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and
converted to uniform internal representations (32-bit floats or 32-bit
integers). These values are converted into text for display on the screen
using the format specifier for the front-panel display. Normally, the
specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be
strongly related to the specifier used to display it (such as, all of the floating
point inputs will be displayed with an 'f' output specifier, and all of the
integer inputs will be displayed with a 'd' specifier).
Format Specifier for The first line of the Layout response is the scanf-like parameter list for
ASCII Responses parsing the fields from an ASCII ERec response. Parameters are separated
by spaces and the line is terminated by a \n (the normal line separator
character). Valid fields are:
%s - parse a string
%d - parse a decimal number
%ld - parse a long (32-bit) decimal number
%f - parse a floating point number
%x - parse a hexadecimal number
%lx - parse a long (32-bit) hex number
%* - ignore the field
Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter; it is
handled automatically.

Format Specifier for The second line of the Layout response is the binary parameter list for
Binary Responses parsing the fields from a binary response. Parameters MUST be separated
by spaces, and the line is terminated by a '\n'. Valid fields are:
t - parse a time specifier (2 bytes)
D - parse a date specifier (3 bytes)
i - ignore one 8-bit character (1 byte)
e - parse a 24-bit floating point number (3 bytes: n/x)
E - parse a 24-bit floating point number (3 bytes: N/x)
f - parse a 32-bit floating point number (4 bytes)
c - parse an 8-bit signed number (1 byte)

C - parse an 8-bit unsigned number (1 byte)
n - parse a 16-bit signed number (2 bytes)
N - parse a 16-bit unsigned number (2 bytes)
m - parse a 24-bit signed number (3 bytes)
M - parse a 24-bit unsigned number (3 bytes)
l - parse a 32-bit signed number (4 bytes)
L - parse a 32-bit unsigned number (4 bytes)
There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric
fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out, the resulting
value is to be divided by 10^d. Thus the 16-bit field 0xFFC6 would be
interpreted with the format specifier 'n3' as the number -0.058.
Format Specifier for The subsequent lines in the ERec Layout response describe the appearance
EREC Layout of the full panel. The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has
two columns of lines. Each line is composed of three major components:
(1) a text field, (2) a value field, and (3) a button. None of these three
components is required. The text field contains statically displayed text.
The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a
DATA/ERec command. It also displays, though background changes,
alarm status. The button, when pressed, triggers input from either a dialog
box or a selection list. There are five kinds of buttons, B, I, L, T, and N.
Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display. The
layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation
mechanisms and corresponding commands.
Text The first field in the layout string is the text. It is delimited by a ':'. The
string up to the first ':' will be read and inserted in the text field of the line.

Value String This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place
a string into the value field.
Value Source The value source, which is the item (or word) number in the DATA/ERec
response, appears next. This is followed by an optional bitfield designator.
The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string 's',
hexadecimal 'x', decimal 'd', or floating point 'f', or binary 'b' number.
Typically, bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal
numbers.
Floating-point numbers can be followed with an optional precision
specifier which will be used as an argument to printf's %f format (e.g., a
field of '4' would be translated into the printf command of '%.3f').
Alternately, the special character '*' can precede the precision specifier; this
causes an indirection on the precision specifier (which now becomes a field
number).
This is useful when formatting, for example, numbers which have varying
precision depending on the mode of the instrument.
Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used
to determine how many bits to print. For example, the specifier 'b4' will
print the lowest four bits of the parsed number.
There are serious restrictions on where an 's' field may appear: currently
sources 1 and 2 must be 's', and no others may be 's'.
Alarm Information The value source is followed by optional alarm information, indicated by a
commercial at sign '@' with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator.
All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long (low and high). The
bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source. Typical
alarm information would appear as '@6.4'.
Translation Table Then, there appears an optional translation table within braces '{}'. This is
a string of words separated by spaces. An example translation table would
be '{Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3}'. The value, once extracted is used
as a zero-based index into the translation table to determine the string to
display.
Selection Table Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses '(...)'.
This is a string of numbers separated by spaces '(0 1)'. The selection table

lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when
setting the parameter. This is not necessarily the same as the entries which
may be displayed.
Button Designator Then there appears an optional button designator. This will be one of 'B',
'I', 'L', 'T', or 'N'.
B- Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the
user for a new value using the designated input format. The input
format is specified from the 'B' through the subsequent semicolon.
IIndicates a button which pops up a selection list with input
translation. That is, the values read are translated before they are
compared to the selection list options.
LIndicates a button which pops up a selection list without any
translation. The output value is number of the selected option.
TIndicates a button which pops up a selection list with output
translation. The number of the option selected is used as an index into
the translation table to generate an output string.
NIndicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to
the instrument. No user-prompting happens.
The following string through an optional | or the end of the line is the
command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the
button selection. The command string should normally contain print-style
formatting to include the user input. If a | is present, it indicates a
command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of
the button command to update the value field.
This is not currently used.

Examples Some examples ('\n' is the C syntax for an end-of-line character):
'Concentrations\n'
This is a single text-only line.
'\n'
This is a single blank line.
' NO:3s\n'
This is a line which appears slightly indented. The text field is 'NO', the
value is taken from the third element of the data response, and interpreted
as a string.
' NO:18sBd.ddd;set no coef %s\n'
This is a line which also appears slightly indented. The next field is also
'NO', but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data
response, again interpreted as a string. A button appears on this line which,
when pressed, pops up an input dialog which will state "Please enter a new
value for NO using a d.ddd format." The string entered by the user is used
to construct the output command. If the user enters, for example, '1.234',
the constructed command will be 'set no coef 1.234'.
' NO:21f{Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 Code_4 Code_5 Code_6

Code_7 Code_8 Code_9 Code_10 Code_11}Lset range no %d\n'
This is a line which appears slightly indented, the title is again 'NO', and
the value the twenty-first element of the data response, interpreted as a
floating-point number. There is a no-translation button which creates a
selection list of twelve "Code nn" options. The number of the user
selection is used to create the output command.

'Mode:6.12-13x{local remote service service}(0 1)Tset mode

%s\n'
This is a line which has a title of 'Mode', and value taken from the sixth
field of the data response. There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through
13 from the source (the value type is not important here because the value
is being translated to an output string). Once the bits have been extracted,
they are shifted down to the bit-zero position. Thus, the possible values of
this example will be 0 through 3. The translation list shows the words
which correspond to each input value, the zeroth value appearing first (0 ->
local, 1 -> remote, etc.). The selection list shows that only the first two
values, in this case, are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed.
The 'T' button indicates full translation, input code to string, and user
selection number to output string.
'\xC'
This is a line that starts a new column (the \xC or ^L),
' Comp:6.11x{off on}Tset temp comp %s\n'
This shows that the bitfield end (the second part of a bitfield specification)
is optional. The bitfield will be one bit long, starting in this case at the
eleventh bit.
'Background:7f*8Bd.ddd;set o3 bkg %s\n'
This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point
displays. The background value is taken from the 7th element, and the
precision specifier is taken from the 8th. If the asterisk were not present, it
would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be
displayed.

Appendix C
MODBUS Protocol
This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface
and is supported both over RS-232/485 (RTU protocol) as well as TCP/IP
over Ethernet.
The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in
this document. The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the
user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and
other analog values or variables, read the status of the digital outputs of the
analyzer, and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the
instrument. This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters
listed below.
For details of the Model 42i MODBUS Protocol specification, see the
following topics:
Serial Communication Parameters on page C-1
TCP Communication Parameters on page C-2
Application Data Unit Definition on page C-2
Function Codes on page C-3
MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C-8
Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at
http://www.modbus.org. References are from MODBUS Application
Protocol Specification V1.1a MODBUS-IDA June 4, 2004.
Serial Communication The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure
the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol.
Parameters
Number of Data bits : 7 or 8
Number of Stop bits : 1 or 2
Parity : None, Odd, or Even
Data rate : 1200 to 115200 Baud (9600 is default)
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual C-1

MODBUS Protocol
TCP Communication Parameters
TCP Communication iSeries Instruments support the MODBUS/TCP protocol. The register
definition is the same as for the serial interface. Up to three simultaneous
Parameters connections are supported over Ethernet.
TCP connection port for MODBUS : 502
Application Data Here are the MODBUS ADU (Application Data Unit) formats over serial
and TCP/IP:
Unit Definition
Serial: Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check
TCP/IP: MBAP Header Function Code Data
Slave Address The MODBUS save address is a single byte in length. This is the same as
the instrument ID used for C-Link commands and can be between 1 and
127 decimal (i.e. 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex). This address is only used for
MODBUS RTU over serial connections.
Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands, is not

supported. Device IDs 128 through 247 (i.e. 0x80 hex to 0xF7 hex) are not
supported because of limitations imposed by C-Link.
MBAP Header In MODBUS over TCP/IP, a MODBUS Application Protocol Header

(MBAP) is used to identify the message. This header consists of the
following components:
Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (Passed back in response)

Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 (MODBUS protocol)
Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (Number of following bytes)
Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to 0xFF (Passed back in response)
C-2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

MODBUS Protocol
Function Codes
A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP/IP because the

higher-level protocols include device addressing. The unit identifier is not
used by the instrument.
Function Code The function code is a single byte in length. The following function codes
are supported by the instrument:
Read Coils : 0x01

: 0x02
Read Inputs
: 0x03
Read Holding Registers
: 0x04
Read Input Registers
: 0x05
Force (Write) Single Coil
: 0x06
Read Exception Status
If a function code is received that is not in this list, an invalid function

exception is returned.
Data The data field varies depending on the function. For more description of
these data fields, see Function Codes below.
Error Check In MODBUS over Serial an error check is included in the message. This is
not necessary in MODBUS over TCP/IP because the higher-level protocols
ensure error-free transmission. The error check is a two-byte (16 bit) CRC
value.
Function Codes This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the
Model 42i.
(0x01/0x02) Read Coils / Read Coils / Inputs read the status of the digital outputs (relays) in the
Read Inputs instrument. Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same
response.
These requests specify the starting address, i.e. the address of the first
output specified, and the number of outputs. The outputs are addressed
starting at zero. Therefore, outputs numbered 116 are addressed as 015.

MODBUS Protocol
Function Codes
The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data
field. Status is indicated as 1 = Active (on) and 0 Inactive (off). The LSB
of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query. The other
outputs follow toward the high end of this byte, and from low order to
high order in subsequent bytes. If the returned output quantity is not a
multiple of eight, the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded
with zeros (toward the high order end of the byte). The Byte Count field
specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data.
Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in
the instrument, as the user may program these outputs for either active
closed or open.
Request
Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02
Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument
Quantity of outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument
Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to 0xFF (Passed back in response)
Response
Byte count 1 Byte N*
Output Status n Byte N = N or N+1
*N = Quantity of Outputs / 8, if the remainder not equal to zero, then N=N+1
Error Response
Exception code 1 Byte 01=Illegal Function, 02=Illegal Address,
03=Illegal Data, 04=Slave Device Failure
Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 215:

MODBUS Protocol
Function Codes
Request
Field Name (Hex)
Function 0x01
Starting Address Hi 0x00
Starting Address Lo 0x02
Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00
Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D
Response
Field Name (Hex)
Function 0x01
Byte Count 0x03
Output Status 210 0xCD
Output Status 1115 0x0A
The status of outputs 210 is shown as the byte value 0xCD, or binary
1100 1101. Output 10 is the MSB of this byte, and output 2 is the LSB.
By convention, bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left, and
the LSB to the right. Thus, the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2,
from left to right. In the last data byte, the status of outputs 15-11 is shown
as the byte value 0x0A, or binary 0000 1010. Output 15 is in the fifth bit
position from the left, and output 11 is the LSB of this byte. The four
remaining high order bits are zero filled.
(0x03/0x04) Read Holding Read holding / input registers reads the measurement data from the
Registers / Read Input instrument. Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same
response. These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous
Registers registers.
These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below. All of
the values are reported as 32-bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format.
This uses 2 sequential registers, least significant 16 bits first.
The request specifies the starting register address and the number of
registers. Registers are addressed starting at zero. Therefore, registers
numbered 116 are addressed as 015. The register data in the response
message are packed as two bytes per register, with the binary contents right
justified within each byte. For each register, the first byte contains the high
order bits and the second contains the low order bits.

MODBUS Protocol
Function Codes
Request
Quantity of Registers 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument
Response
Byte count 1 Byte 2 x N*
Register value N* x 2 Bytes N = N or N+1
*N = Quantity of Registers
Error Response
Function code 1 Byte Function code + 0x80
Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 1013:
Request
Field Name (Hex)
Function 0x03
Starting Address Hi 0x00
Starting Address Lo 0x09
No. of Registers Hi 0x00
No. of Registers Lo 0x04
Response
Field Name (Hex)
Function 0x03
Byte Count 0x06
Register value Hi (10) 0x02
Register value Lo (10) 0x2B

MODBUS Protocol
Function Codes
Register value Lo (11) 0x00

The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B.
Then contents of registers 1113 are 0x00 0x00, 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64
respectively.
(0x05) Force (Write) The force (write) single coil function simulates the activation of the digital
Single Coil inputs in the instrument, which triggers the respective action.
This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF. The
request specifies the address of the action to be forced. Actions are
addressed starting at zero. Therefore, action number 1 is addressed as 0.
The requested ON/OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data
field. A value of 0xFF00 requests the action to be ON. A value of 0x0000
requests it to be OFF. All other values are illegal and will not affect the
output. The normal response is an echo of the request, returned after the
state has been written.
Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode.
Request
Function code 1 Byte 0x05
Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or 0xFF00
Response
Function code 1 Byte 0x05
Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or 0xFF00
Error Response
Function code 1 Byte Function code + 0x80

MODBUS Protocol
MODBUS Parameters Supported

Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON:
Request
Field Name (Hex)
Function 05
Output Address Hi 00
Output Address Lo 05
Output Value Hi FF
Output Value Lo 00
Response
Field Name (Hex)
Function 05
Output Address Hi 00
Output Address Lo 05
Output Value Hi FF
Output Value Lo 00
MODBUS Parameters Table C1 through Table C3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for
the Model 51i.
Supported
IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) addresses. Verify the coil number on your MODBUS
master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument.
Note Coil status 1 indicates active state.
Table C1. Read Coils for 42i

Coil Number Status
0 NOT USED
1 AUTORANGE (NOx)
2 LOCAL/REMOTE

MODBUS Protocol
Coil Number Status

3 SERVICE
4 UNITS
5 ZERO MODE Zero/Span Option
6 SPAN MODE Zero/Span Option
7 NO MODE
8 NOx MODE
9 NOT USED
10 NOT USED
11 GEN ALARM
12 NO CONC MAX ALARM
13 NO CONC MIN ALARM
14 NO2 CONC MAX ALARM
15 NO2 CONC MIN ALARM
16 NOx CONC MAX ALARM
17 NOx CONC MIN ALARM
18 NOT USED
19 NOT USED
20 NOT USED
21 NOT USED
22 INT TEMP ALARM
23 CHAMB TEMP ALARM
24 COOLER TEMP ALARM
25 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP ALARM
26 NOT USED
27 PERM OVEN GAS TEMP ALARM Perm Span Option
28 PRESSURE ALARM
29 FLOW ALARM Bypass Flow Option
30 OZONE FLOW ALARM
31 MOTHERBOARD STATUS ALARM
32 INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM
33 I/O EXP BD STATUS ALARM I/O Expansion Board Option
34 NOT USED
35 CONC ALARM
36 SAMPLE MODE

MODBUS Protocol
Coil Number Status

37 PURGE MODE Zero/Span Option
38 NOT USED
39 ZERO CHECK/CAL ALARM Zero/Span Option
40 SPAN CHECK/CAL ALARM Zero/Span Option
41 O2 SENSOR ALARM Internal O2 Sensor Option
42 NOT USED
43 NOT USED
44 NOT USED
45 NOT USED
46 NOT USED
47 NOT USED
48 NOT USED
49 NOT USED
50 NOT USED
51 NOT USED
52 NOT USED
53 NOT USED
54 NOT USED
55 NOT USED
56 NOT USED
57 NOT USED
58 NOT USED
59 NOT USED
60 EXT ALARM 1
61 EXT ALARM 2
62 EXT ALARM 3
In addition to the coils listed in the Read Coils table, coils in the Write
Coils table can also be read.

Data Unit (PDU) addresses. Verify the register number on your
MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the
instrument.

MODBUS Protocol
Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the
data, refer to the (0x03/0x04) Read Holding Registers / Read Input
Registers section in this appendix.
Table C2. Read Registers for 42i

Register Variable
Number
0 NOT USED
1&2 NO
3&4 NO2
5&6 NOx
7&8 NOT USED
9 & 10 NOT USED
11 & 12 LOW NO
13 & 14 LOW NO2
15 & 16 LOW NOx
17 & 18 NOT USED
19 & 20 NOT USED
21 & 22 HIGH NO
23 & 24 HIGH NO2
25 & 26 HIGH NOx
27 & 28 NOT USED
29 & 30 NOT USED
31 & 32 RANGE (NOx)
33 & 34 NOT USED
35 & 36 INTERNAL TEMPERATURE
37 & 38 CHAMBER TEMPERATURE
39 & 40 COOLER TEMPERATURE
41 & 42 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP
43 & 44 NOT USED
45 & 46 PERM OVEN GAS Perm Span Option
47 & 48 PERM OVEN HEATER Perm Span Option
49 & 50 CHAMBER PRESSURE
51 & 52 SAMPLE FLOW Bypass Flow Option
53 & 54 PMT VOLTS

MODBUS Protocol
Register Variable
Number
55 & 56 ANALOG IN 1/NO BKG** I/O Expansion Board Option*
57 & 58 ANALOG IN 2/NOx BKG** I/O Expansion Board Option*
59 & 60 ANALOG IN 3/LO NO COEF** I/O Expansion Board Option*
61 & 62 ANALOG IN 4/LO NO2 COEF** I/O Expansion Board Option*
63 & 64 ANALOG IN 5/LO NOx COEF** I/O Expansion Board Option*
65 & 66 ANALOG IN 6/HI NO COEF** I/O Expansion Board Option*
67 & 68 ANALOG IN 7/HI NO2 COEF** I/O Expansion Board Option*
69 & 70 ANALOG IN 8/HI NOx COEF** I/O Expansion Board Option*
71 & 72 OZONATOR FLOW
73 & 74 NOT USED
75 & 76 NOT USED
77 & 78 NOT USED
79 & 80 NO CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
81 & 82 NO2 CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
83 & 84 NOx CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
85 & 86 NOT USED
87 & 88 NOT USED
89 & 90 LOW NO CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
91 & 92 LOW NO2 CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
93 & 94 LOW NOx CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
95 & 96 NOT USED
97 & 98 NOT USED
99 & 100 HIGH NO CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
101 & 102 HIGH NO2 CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
103 & 104 HIGH NOx CORRECTION CONC O2 Sensor Option
105 & 106 NOT USED
107 & 108 NOT USED
109 & 110 NOT USED
111 & 112 O2 % Internal O2 Sensor Option
113 & 114 O2 SENS TEMP Internal O2 Sensor Option
115 & 116 NOT USED
117 & 118 NOT USED
119 & 120 NOT USED

MODBUS Protocol
Register Variable
Number
121 & 122 EXT ALARMS
*
The analog inputs 18 will not show if the Ouput Conc Cal option is set to YES in the Instrument
Configuration screen.
**
BKG and COEF items are displayed only if Ouput Conc Cal option is set to YES in the Instrument
Configuration screen.

Data Unit (PDU) addresses. Verify the coil number on your MODBUS
master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument.
Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will
initiate the action triggered listed in the table. This state must be held for
at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers
the appropriate action.
Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually
exclusive and will not be triggered if there is conflict. Before you assert (1)
one coil in a group, make sure the other coils in the group are de-asserted
(0).
Table C3. Write Coils for 42i

Coil Number Action Triggered Coil Group
100 NOT USED
101 ZERO MODE Zero/Span Mode Zero/Span Option
102 SPAN MODE Zero/Span Mode Zero/Span Option
103 NO MODE Measure Mode
104 NOX MODE Measure Mode
105 NOT USED
106 NOT USED
107 SET BACKGROUND
108 CAL TO LO SPAN
109 AOUTS TO ZERO Analog Out Test I/O Expansion Board Option
110 AOUTS TO FS Analog Out Test I/O Expansion Board Option
111 CAL TO HI SPAN
112 NOT USED
113 NOT USED

MODBUS Protocol
Coil Number Action Triggered Coil Group

114 NOT USED
115 NOT USED
116 NOT USED
117 EXT ALARM 1
118 EXT ALARM 2
119 EXT ALARM 3
120 NOT USED
Reading a Write Coil To read a write coil, issue a read coil command for that coil. For example,
to view the state of write coil 101, issue a read coil 101.

Appendix D
Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol
This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen or
BH) Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS-232/485 as well as
TCP/IP over Ethernet.
The Geysitech Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in
this document. The Geysitech protocol support for the iSeries enables the
user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to
trigger the instrument to be in sample/zero/span mode if valid for that
instrument. This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands
listed below.
For details of the Model 42i Geysitech Protocol specification, see the
following topics:
Serial Communication Parameters on page D-1
TCP Communication Parameters on page D-2
Instrument Address on page D-2
"Abbreviations Used on page D-2
Basic Command Structure on page D-2
Block Checksum on page D-3
Geysitech Commands on page D-2
Serial Communication The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure
the serial port of the iSeries to support Geysitech protocol.
Parameters
Number of Data bits : 7 or 8
Number of Stop bits : 1 or 2
Parity : None, Odd, or Even
Data rate : 1200 to 115200 Baud (9600 is default)
Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual D-1

TCP Communication Parameters
TCP Communication iSeries Instruments support the Geysitech/TCP protocol over TCP/IP. The
register definition is the same as for the serial interface. Up to three
Parameters simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet.
TCP connection port for Geysitech: 9882
Instrument Address The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is
represented by 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if
required (e.g. Instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or <SP><SP>1)
The instrument Address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C-Link
and MODBUS commands. This can be set via the front panel.
The Instrument Address is represented by <address> in the examples
throughout this document.
Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of
limitations imposed by the C-Link protocol.
Abbreviations Used The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document:

<CR> is abbreviation for Carriage Return (ASCII code 0x0D)
<STX> is abbreviation for Start of Text (ASCII code 0x02)
<ETX> is abbreviation for End of Text (ASCII code 0x03)
<SP> is abbreviation for space (ASCII code 0x20)
Basic Command The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command:

Structure <STX>Command text<ETX><BCC>
OR
<STX>Command text<CR>
Each command is framed by control characters, <STX> at the start and
terminated with either <ETX> or <CR>.
If a command is terminated with <ETX>, then two additional characters
<BCC> is attached after <ETX>. This is the block checksum.
Block Checksum Characters <BCC> may be added to the command to
prevent processing invalid commands.
D-2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Block Checksum Characters <BCC>
Block Checksum The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value
of 00000000, binary (0x00), and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the
Characters <BCC> characters of the command string (or response) including the framing
characters <STX> and <ETX>. The checksum works as an error check. The
command terminator determines the presence or absence of <BCC>.
If a command is terminated by <ETX> then the next two characters are the
checksum, if the command is terminated with <CR> no checksum is
attached.
The block checksum is represented by two characters, which represent a 2
digit hex number (1byte) (e.g. 1 byte 0xAB hex checksum will be
represented by the two characters A & B).
The checksum is referred to as <BCC> throughout this document.
Geysitech Commands The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol:
Instrument Control Command (ST)
Data Sampling/Data Query Command (DA)
Instrument Control Command There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol.
(ST) This <control command> is a single letter, which triggers an action in the
instrument. These commands are active only when service mode is inactive
and the zero/span option is present.
Command N switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode.
Command K switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode.
Command M switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode.
The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command:
<STX>ST<address><control command><ETX><BCC>
OR
<STX>ST<address><control command><CR>
OR
<STX>ST<address><SP><control command><CR>
OR
<STX>ST<address><SP><control command><ETX><BCC>

Geysitech Commands
The <address> is optional, which means it can be left out completely. The
<address> if present must match the Instrument Address. Additional space
can be present after the <address>.
If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the
<address> does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored.
This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode,
instrument id 5:
<STX>ST005<SP>N<CR>
Data Sampling/Data This command DA initiates a data transfer from the instrument. The
Query Command instrument responds with measurement data, which depends on the range
mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA
(DA) command below.
The command structure for a data query command is as follows:
<STX>DA<address><ETX><BCC>
The <address> is optional, which means it can be left out completely. The
<address> if present must match the Instrument Address. Additional space
can be present after the <address>.
If the <address> is left out then no space is allowed in the query string.
A command with no address is also a valid command.
The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command
with Instrument Address 5:
<STX>DA<CR>
<STX>DA005<CR>
<STX>DA<SP><SP>5<ETX><BCC>
<STX>DA<ETX><BCC>
The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission
only if the command starts with <STX> which is followed by the characters
DA, and the <address> (if present) matches the Instrument Address, and
the command is terminated with either <CR> with no checksum or <ETX>
followed by the correct checksum <BCC>.

Geysitech Commands
Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command (DA):

In response to a valid data query command (DA) the instrument responds
in the following format:
<STX>MD02<SP><address><SP><measured
value1><SP><status><SP><SFKT><SP><address+1><SP><measured
value2><SP ><status><SP><SFKT><ETX><BCC>
The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received
command i.e. if the received command was terminated with a <CR> the
response is terminated with <CR> and if the command was terminated
with a <ETX><BCC> the response is terminated with<ETX> and the
computed checksum <BCC>.
The 02 after the MD indicates, that two measurements are present in the
reply string, (a 03 for three measurements and so on, this will also
determine the length of the reply string).
<address> is the Instrument Address. Each subsequent measurement
attached to the response will have the <address + X> where X keeps
incrementing by 1 for each measurement included.
<measured value> is the concentration value in currently selected gas units
represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2
characters exponent, each with sign.
Mantissa: sign and 4 digits. The decimal point is assumed to be after the
first digit and is not transmitted.
Exponent: sign and 2 digits.
Example:
-5384000.0 is represented as -5384+06
+0.04567 is represented as +4567-02
<status>: is formed by < operating status > and < error status > and
separated by a space i.e.
<operating status><SP><error status>
Each of the two (<operating status> and <error status>) are formed by two
characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte (8 Bits)
operation status and one byte (8 Bits) error status.
These two bytes contain the information about the main operating
conditions of the instrument at that instant. For details on how to interpret
the status bytes refer to Table D1 and Table D2 below.
<SFKT>: is the space provided for future use for special function, it
currently contains a string of ten 0s i.e. <0000000000>.

Geysitech Commands
Example:
Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations (Instrument
ID is 1, Operation Status is 03, Error Status is 04):
Data Query String: <STX>DA<CR>
Reply String:
<STX>MD03<SP>001<SP>+2578+01<SP>03 <SP>04<SP>0000000000 <SP>002 <SP>

Address First Concentration(E-format)=25.78 Address+1
+5681+00<SP>03<SP>04<SP>0000000000<SP>003<SP>+1175+01<SP>03<SP>04<SP

Second Concentration = 5.681 Address+2 Third Concentration=11.75
0000000000<SP><CR>
The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units. The

measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular
mode then a value of 0.0 will be reported.
Measurements reported in The following measurements reported in response to DA command are for
response to DA command the Model 42i.
Single Range Mode The 3 measurements reported in single range mode include:
NO
NO2
NOx
Dual/Auto Range Mode The 6 measurements reported in dual or auto range modes include:
low NO
low NO2
low NOx
high NO
high NO2
high NOx
Operating and Error See Table D1 for operating status and Table D2 for error status for the
Status Model 42i.

Geysitech Commands
Table D1. Operating Status for Model 42i

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Hex-value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01
MSB LSB
Operating status:
Service Mode (On) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Maintenance (Local) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Zero gas (On) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Span gas (On) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Gas Unit Indication (ppm OR ppb) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Ozonator (Off) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
PMT (Off) 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Not used 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table D2. Error Status for Model 42i

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Hex-value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01
MSB LSB
Error status:
Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Any Temperature Alarm 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Pressure Alarm 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Sample Flow Alarm 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Ozonator Flow Alarm 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Not used 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

EPM Manual Model 42i

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EPM Manual Model 42i

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EPM Manual Model 42i

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model 42i

Thermo Fisher Scientific

Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more

Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance

Range 50 to 1000 ppb

With or without the following options:

Teflon Particulate Filter

Thermo Fisher Scientific Reference Method Designation

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual i

Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the

Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions

WARNING A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious

CAUTION A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to

Equipment Damage A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property

ii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Safety and Equipment damage Alerts in this Manual

Some internal components can be damaged by small

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual iii

1-866-282-0430 Toll Free

iv Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Chapter 2 Installation ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 3-1

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual v

Calibrate NO, NO2, and NOx Coefficients .................................... 3-21

vi Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Use DHCP ................................................................................. 3-41

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual vii

Digital Inputs ................................................................................. 3-63

viii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Analog Output Calibration ............................................................ 3-83

Chapter 4 Calibration .......................................................................................................... 4-1

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual ix

Reagents ........................................................................................... 4-4

Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................. 5-1

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 6-1

Chapter 7 Servicing ............................................................................................................. 7-1

x Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Firmware Updates ............................................................................... 7-4

Chapter 8 System Description .......................................................................................... 8-1

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xi

Optical Filter.................................................................................... 8-3

Chapter 9 Optional Equipment........................................................................................... 9-1

xii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Oven Installation and Configuration................................................ 9-4

Appendix A Warranty ............................................................................................................ A-1

Appendix B C-Link Protocol Commands............................................................................ B-1

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xiii

Value String ................................................................................ B-57

Appendix C MODBUS Protocol............................................................................................ C-1

Appendix D Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol ........................................................... D-1

xiv Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xv

xvi Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual xvii

Table B2. Averaging Times ............................................................................. B-11

xviii Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

320 x 240 graphics display

For details of the analyzers principle of operation and product

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual 1-1

Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this NO-NO2-NOx analyzer.